Download TM-1001 AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations Rev 5.0.pdf...
PDMS Foundations
TM-1001
TRAINING GUIDE
AVEVA Plant (12 Series)
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 2
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Revision Log Date 24/07/2009 04/08/2009 06/08/2009 09/09/2009 10/09/2009 10/09/2009 16/10/2009 21/10/2009 25/11/2009
Revision
Description of Revision
Author
2.1 2.2 3.0 3.1 3.2 4.0 4.1 4.2 5.0
Issued for Review Reviewed Approved for Training PDMS 12.0.SP4 Search Results Updated Search Results Reviewed Approved for Training PDMS 12.0.SP4 Issued for Review PDMS 12.0.SP5 Reviewed Approved for Training PDMS 12.0.SP5
NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG NG
Reviewed
Approved
BT BT
RP
BT BT
RP
KB KB
RP
Updates All headings containing updated or new material will be highlighted.
Suggestion / Problems If you have a suggestion about this manual or the system to which it refers please report it to the AVEVA Group Solutions Centre at
[email protected] This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have access or which may not be licensed to you. For further information on which products are licensed to you please refer to your licence conditions. Visit our website at http://www.aveva.com
Disclaimer Information of a technical nature, and particulars of the product and its use, is given by AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries without warranty. AVEVA Solutions Ltd. and its subsidiaries disclaim any and all warranties and conditions, expressed or implied, to the fullest extent permitted by law. Neither the author nor AVEVA Solutions Ltd or any of its subsidiaries shall be liable to any person or entity for any actions, claims, loss or damage arising from the use or possession of any information, particulars or errors in this publication, or any incorrect use of the product, whatsoever.
Trademarks AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden. AVEVA product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Ltd or its subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide). The copyright, trademark rights or other intellectual property rights in any other product, its name or logo belongs to its respective owner.
www.aveva.com 3
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Copyright Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it (including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied with it) belongs to AVEVA Solutions Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All other rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Ltd and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires that this Disclaimer and Copyright notice is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is made. The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied in any material or electronic form without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Ltd. The user may also not reverse engineer, decompile, copy or adapt the associated software. Neither the whole nor part of the product described in this publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine or system without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited or save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly prohibited and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution. The AVEVA products described in this guide are to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms and conditions of the respective licence agreements, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation. Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the product is strictly prohibited. Printed by AVEVA Solutions on 26 November 2009. © AVEVA Solutions and its subsidiaries 2001 – 2009. AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.
www.aveva.com 4
Contents 1
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................ 11 1.1 Aim .................................................................................................................................................. 11 1.2 Objectives ....................................................................................................................................... 11 1.3 Prerequisites .................................................................................................................................. 11 1.4 Course Structure ............................................................................................................................ 11 1.5 Using this guide ............................................................................................................................. 11 2 AVEVA PDMS Fundamentals................................................................................................................ 13 2.1 How PDMS can help you ............................................................................................................... 13 2.2 How PDMS is Structured ............................................................................................................... 14 2.2.1 Design ...................................................................................................................................... 14 2.2.2 Draft.......................................................................................................................................... 15 2.2.3 Isodraft ..................................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.4 Admin ....................................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.5 Paragon .................................................................................................................................... 17 2.2.6 Propcon .................................................................................................................................... 17 2.2.7 Lexicon ..................................................................................................................................... 17 2.3 PDMS Databases ............................................................................................................................ 18 2.4 How data is stored in PDMS ......................................................................................................... 19 2.4.1 World (WORL) .......................................................................................................................... 20 2.4.2 Site (SITE) ................................................................................................................................ 20 2.4.3 Zone (ZONE) ............................................................................................................................ 20 2.4.4 Equipment (EQUI) .................................................................................................................... 20 2.4.5 Sub-Equipment (SUBE) ........................................................................................................... 20 2.4.6 Primitives .................................................................................................................................. 21 2.4.7 Volume Model (VOLM) ............................................................................................................. 21 2.4.8 Sub-Volume Model (SVOLM) ................................................................................................... 21 2.4.9 Structure (STRU)...................................................................................................................... 21 2.4.10 Framework (FRMW) ................................................................................................................. 21 2.4.11 Sub-Framework (SBFR) ........................................................................................................... 21 2.4.12 Structural Components ............................................................................................................ 21 2.4.13 Pipe (PIPE)............................................................................................................................... 21 2.4.14 Branch (BRAN)......................................................................................................................... 21 2.4.15 Piping Components .................................................................................................................. 22 2.5 Element Names in PDMS............................................................................................................... 22 2.6 Units ................................................................................................................................................ 22 2.7 Axis System .................................................................................................................................... 23 3 User Interface Basics ............................................................................................................................ 25 3.1 Accessing the Design Environment............................................................................................. 25 3.2 Default Screen Layout ................................................................................................................... 26 3.3 Using the Mouse ............................................................................................................................ 26 3.4 Using Menus ................................................................................................................................... 27 3.4.1 Pull-Down Menus ..................................................................................................................... 27 3.4.2 Sub-menus ............................................................................................................................... 28 3.4.3 Context Pop-up menus ............................................................................................................ 28 3.5 Using Forms ................................................................................................................................... 29 3.5.1 Tabs ......................................................................................................................................... 29 3.5.2 Radio Buttons ........................................................................................................................... 30 3.5.3 Checkboxes.............................................................................................................................. 30 3.5.4 Text Boxes ............................................................................................................................... 30 3.5.5 Scrollable Lists (Options List)................................................................................................... 30 3.5.6 Buttons ..................................................................................................................................... 31 3.5.7 Link Labels ............................................................................................................................... 31 3.5.8 Fold-up Panels ......................................................................................................................... 31 3.5.9 Grids ......................................................................................................................................... 31 3.5.10 Form Menus ............................................................................................................................. 31 3.5.11 Actioning Form Inputs .............................................................................................................. 32 3.5.12 Alert Forms ............................................................................................................................... 32 www.aveva.com 3.5.13 Dockable Forms ....................................................................................................................... 33 5
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.6 Using Toolbars ............................................................................................................................... 36 3.7 Command Window ......................................................................................................................... 36 3.7.1 Entering Command Syntax ...................................................................................................... 36 3.7.2 Command Window Pop-up Menu ............................................................................................ 37 3.8 Navigating the Databases ............................................................................................................. 38 3.8.1 Design Explorer ........................................................................................................................ 38 3.8.2 Members List ............................................................................................................................ 42 3.8.3 History Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 43 3.9 Deleting Elements from the Databases ....................................................................................... 43 3.9.1 Deleting using Design Explorer ................................................................................................ 44 3.9.2 Deleting using the Main Menu.................................................................................................. 44 3.9.3 Deleting using the Default Toolbar ........................................................................................... 45 3.9.4 Deleting using the Command Window ..................................................................................... 45 3.10 Saving Changes to the Databases – Save Work......................................................................... 45 3.11 Updating Databases to Show Other Changes – Get Work ........................................................ 46 3.12 Undo and Redo............................................................................................................................... 46 3.13 On-line Help .................................................................................................................................... 46 3.14 Leaving PDMS ................................................................................................................................ 47 Exercise 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 48 4 Displaying Modelled Elements ............................................................................................................. 53 4.1 Building the Drawlist ..................................................................................................................... 53 4.1.1 Populating the Drawlist Form ................................................................................................... 53 4.1.2 Using the Drawlist Form ........................................................................................................... 56 4.1.3 Additional Drawlist Functions ................................................................................................... 59 4.2 Setting the View Limits .................................................................................................................. 61 4.2.1 Using the View Control Buttons ............................................................................................... 61 4.2.2 Using the View Menu ............................................................................................................... 62 4.2.3 Using the 3D View Pop-up Menu ............................................................................................. 63 4.2.4 Using the Element Pop-up Menu ............................................................................................. 63 4.3 Setting the View Direction............................................................................................................. 63 4.3.1 Using the View Menu ............................................................................................................... 63 4.3.2 Using the 3D View Pop-up Menu ............................................................................................. 65 Exercise 2 ....................................................................................................................................................... 66 5 Working with 3D Views ......................................................................................................................... 69 5.1 Modes of Operation in 3D Views .................................................................................................. 69 5.2 Graphical Selections ..................................................................................................................... 69 5.2.1 Selecting Items Individually ...................................................................................................... 69 5.2.2 Fence Selection........................................................................................................................ 70 5.2.3 Clearing the Graphical Selection.............................................................................................. 70 5.2.4 Reinstating the Previous Graphical Selection .......................................................................... 71 5.3 Navigate to Element Button .......................................................................................................... 71 5.4 Multiple, Local and Clone Views .................................................................................................. 72 5.4.1 Multiple Views .......................................................................................................................... 72 5.4.2 Local Views .............................................................................................................................. 73 5.4.3 Clone Views ............................................................................................................................. 74 5.5 View Projection Mode .................................................................................................................... 74 5.6 Zoom, Pan, Rotate and Walk......................................................................................................... 76 5.6.1 Setting the Middle Mouse Button Options ................................................................................ 76 5.6.2 Zoom ........................................................................................................................................ 77 5.6.3 Pan ........................................................................................................................................... 77 5.6.4 Rotate ....................................................................................................................................... 77 5.6.5 Walk ......................................................................................................................................... 78 5.6.6 Controlling the speed of middle mouse button operations ....................................................... 78 5.7 Setting the View Centre ................................................................................................................. 79 5.8 Clipping ........................................................................................................................................... 79 5.9 More View Menu Options .............................................................................................................. 82 5.10 Graphics Settings .......................................................................................................................... 83 5.10.1 Graphics Settings – 3D Views Tab .......................................................................................... 83 5.10.2 Graphics Settings - Colour Tab ................................................................................................ 83 5.10.3 Graphics Settings – Representation Tab ................................................................................. 84 www.aveva.com 5.10.4 Graphics Settings – Steelwork Tab .......................................................................................... 85 6
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.10.5 Graphics Settings – Plines and Ppoints Tab............................................................................ 86 Exercise 3 ....................................................................................................................................................... 87 6 Attributes, Positioning and Orientation............................................................................................... 93 6.1 Element Attributes ......................................................................................................................... 93 6.1.1 Pseudo Attributes ..................................................................................................................... 94 6.1.2 User Defined Attributes ............................................................................................................ 94 6.1.3 Querying and Displaying Attributes .......................................................................................... 95 6.1.4 Modifying Attributes .................................................................................................................. 96 6.2 Positioning...................................................................................................................................... 97 6.2.1 The Positioning Control Toolbar............................................................................................... 98 6.2.2 Positioning Explicitly ............................................................................................................... 100 6.2.3 Positioning Relatively ............................................................................................................. 101 6.3 Orientation .................................................................................................................................... 102 6.3.1 Display Axes on CE ............................................................................................................... 103 6.3.2 Setting Orientation using Axes ............................................................................................... 104 6.3.3 Setting Orientation using Rotate ............................................................................................ 104 Exercise 4 ..................................................................................................................................................... 107 7 General Utilities.................................................................................................................................... 113 7.1 Lists ............................................................................................................................................... 113 7.2 Groups .......................................................................................................................................... 115 7.2.1 Creating Group Worlds .......................................................................................................... 116 7.2.2 Creating Group Sets .............................................................................................................. 116 7.2.3 Managing Groups ................................................................................................................... 116 7.3 My Data ......................................................................................................................................... 118 7.4 Search Utility ................................................................................................................................ 120 7.4.1 Specifying the Items to Search for ......................................................................................... 120 7.4.2 Search Filters ......................................................................................................................... 121 7.4.3 Attribute Filters ....................................................................................................................... 122 7.4.4 Saved Searches ..................................................................................................................... 123 7.4.5 Executing the Search from the Search form .......................................................................... 124 7.4.6 Search Results ....................................................................................................................... 125 7.5 User Grid Systems ....................................................................................................................... 131 7.5.1 Creating 3D Rectangular Grids .............................................................................................. 131 7.5.2 Creating 3D Radial Grids ....................................................................................................... 134 7.5.3 Grid Display Options .............................................................................................................. 136 7.5.4 Modifying User Grid Systems................................................................................................. 138 7.5.5 Deleting User Grid Systems ................................................................................................... 138 7.5.6 Displaying Picked Positions in Grid Coordinates ................................................................... 139 7.6 Measuring ..................................................................................................................................... 139 7.6.1 Distance Measure .................................................................................................................. 139 7.6.2 Angle Measure ....................................................................................................................... 141 7.7 Claimlists in Multiwrite Databases ............................................................................................. 144 Exercise 5 ..................................................................................................................................................... 146 8 Introduction to Model Editor ............................................................................................................... 153 8.1 Model Editor Mode ....................................................................................................................... 153 8.1.1 The Locator Handle ................................................................................................................ 153 8.2 Overview of Model Editor Operations ........................................................................................ 154 8.2.1 Movement............................................................................................................................... 154 8.2.2 Rotation .................................................................................................................................. 154 8.2.3 Alignment ............................................................................................................................... 155 8.2.4 Locator Handle as a Frame of Reference .............................................................................. 155 8.2.5 Feedback................................................................................................................................ 155 8.2.6 Unconstrained Positioning ..................................................................................................... 155 8.2.7 Undo and Redo ...................................................................................................................... 155 8.2.8 Performance ........................................................................................................................... 156 8.3 The Selection Menu ..................................................................................................................... 156 8.4 Positioning and Orientation using the Locator Handle ........................................................... 157 8.4.1 Aligning the Graphical Selection with points or lines on other displayed items ..................... 157 8.4.2 Automatic Scrolling ................................................................................................................ 157 8.4.3 Linear Movement Handles ..................................................................................................... 157 www.aveva.com 8.4.4 Planar Movement Handles ..................................................................................................... 159 7
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
8.4.5 Rotation Handles .................................................................................................................... 161 8.4.6 Dragging the Locator Handle Independently of the Graphical Selection ............................... 163 8.5 Graphical Equipment Modification (GEM) ................................................................................. 163 8.5.1 Display Characteristics ........................................................................................................... 163 8.6 Positioning and Orientation Using the Edit Menu .................................................................... 164 Exercise 6 ..................................................................................................................................................... 167 9 Basic Equipment Modelling ................................................................................................................ 173 9.1 The Principles of Modelling Equipment .................................................................................... 173 9.1.1 User Defined Elements Types for Equipment ........................................................................ 173 9.1.2 The Equipment Hierarchy ...................................................................................................... 174 9.1.3 Primitives ................................................................................................................................ 174 9.1.4 Equipment and Primitive Orientation ..................................................................................... 176 9.1.5 Equipment, Sub-Equipment and Origin ................................................................................. 176 9.1.6 Naming Equipment ................................................................................................................. 176 9.2 The Equipment Application ........................................................................................................ 176 9.2.1 The Create Menu ................................................................................................................... 177 9.2.2 The Modify Menu.................................................................................................................... 180 9.2.3 The Position Menu ................................................................................................................. 184 9.2.4 The Orientate Menu ............................................................................................................... 187 9.2.5 The Connect Menu ................................................................................................................. 187 9.2.6 The Equipment Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 188 9.3 Creating Equipment – A Worked Example ................................................................................ 189 9.3.1 Information and Decisions...................................................................................................... 191 9.3.2 Creating the EQUI Element.................................................................................................... 192 9.3.3 Creating the Primitives ........................................................................................................... 193 Exercise 7 ..................................................................................................................................................... 208 Exercise 8 ..................................................................................................................................................... 211 10 Equipment Modelling Using Templates......................................................................................... 213 10.1 Equipment Template Overview................................................................................................... 213 10.2 Creating Standard Equipment – A Worked Example ............................................................... 214 10.2.1 Information ............................................................................................................................. 214 10.2.2 Creating E1302B .................................................................................................................... 216 10.2.3 Creating E1302A using Copy Mirror ...................................................................................... 221 10.3 Using Selection Tables ................................................................................................................ 224 Exercise 9 ..................................................................................................................................................... 225 10.4 Creating Electrical Components ................................................................................................ 227 10.4.1 Creating an Electrical Component – A Worked Example ...................................................... 229 11 Equipment Utilities .......................................................................................................................... 231 11.1 Import Equipment Utility ............................................................................................................. 231 11.1.1 Rules for the Content of Import XLS and CSV Files .............................................................. 233 11.2 Equipment Report Utility ............................................................................................................. 234 11.2.1 Selecting Attributes to Output ................................................................................................ 235 11.2.2 Outputting Attributes .............................................................................................................. 236 Exercise 10 ................................................................................................................................................... 238 12 Volume Modelling ............................................................................................................................ 239 12.1 The Volume Model Hierarchy...................................................................................................... 239 12.2 Creating VOLM and SVOLM Elements ....................................................................................... 239 12.3 Creating Primitives ...................................................................................................................... 240 12.4 Creating Volume and Sub Volume Models – A Worked Example ........................................... 241 12.4.1 Creating the Slab UDET......................................................................................................... 243 12.4.2 Creating the Slab Primitive..................................................................................................... 244 Exercise 11 ................................................................................................................................................... 246 APPENDIX A – AVEVA Equipment Primitives .......................................................................................... 249 Box (BOX) ................................................................................................................................................. 249 Cylinder (CYLI) ......................................................................................................................................... 249 Cone (CONE) ............................................................................................................................................ 250 Snout (SNOU) ........................................................................................................................................... 250 Pyramid (PYRA) ....................................................................................................................................... 251 Circular Torus (CTOR)............................................................................................................................. 251 Rectangular Torus (RTOR) ..................................................................................................................... 252 www.aveva.com Dish (DISH) ............................................................................................................................................... 252 8
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Sloped Cylinder (SLCY) .......................................................................................................................... 253 Extrusion (EXTR) ..................................................................................................................................... 253 Solid of Revolution (REVO) .................................................................................................................... 254 Nozzle (NOZZ) .......................................................................................................................................... 255
www.aveva.com 9
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 10
CHAPTER 1
1
Introduction
AVEVA PDMS is a complex program with different applications that enables discipline designers to create a 3D model of a plant design. These applications use common features within the Design module that designers need to be familiar with before embarking on discipline specific application training.
1.1
Aim
The aim of this training module is to provide the basic knowledge of the common features that provide the ‘foundations’ for PDMS Design.
1.2
Explain how PDMS can assist in Plant design Familiarise trainees with the basics of the User Interface Explain how to manipulate the model in 3D Explain Element Attributes, Positioning and Orientation of Elements Introduce the Model Editor for graphical model manipulation Explain how to create Equipment in PDMS Explain how to create Volume Models in PDMS
1.3
Objectives
Prerequisites
Keyboard Skills Familiarisation with Microsoft Windows Knowledge of Plant Design
1.4
Course Structure
Training will consist of oral and visual presentations, demonstrations and set exercises. Each workstation will have a training project, populated with model objects. This will be used by the trainees to practice their methods, and complete the set exercises.
1.5
Using this guide
Certain text styles are used to indicate special situations throughout this document, here is a summary; Menu pull downs and button press actions are indicated by bold dark turquoise text. Information the user has to key-in will be in bold red text. Annotation for trainees benefit:
L
Additional information Refer to other documentation System prompts will be bold and italic in inverted commas i.e. 'Choose function'
Example files or inputs will be in the courier new font, colours and styles used as before.
www.aveva.com 11
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 12
CHAPTER 2 2
AVEVA PDMS Fundamentals
The AVEVA Plant Design Management System (PDMS) is a multi-discipline 3D modelling system that allows you to simulate a detailed, full size model of all the significant parts of a process plant. PDMS allows you to see a full colour shaded representation of the plant model as your design progresses, adding an unprecedented level of realism to design office techniques.
2.1
How PDMS can help you
In the model you can store huge amounts of data referring to position, size, part numbers and geometric relationships for the various parts of the plant. This model becomes a single source of engineering data for all of the sections and disciplines involved in a design project. All this information is stored in databases. There are many different output channels from the databases through which information can be disseminated including textual reports, fully annotated and dimensioned arrangement and detailed drawings, piping and HVAC isometrics and interfaces to a variety of stressing, analysis, detailing and visualisation products.
Different types of output from PDMS All the data in a PDMS design would be of little value without the ability to ensure the quality of the design information. Indeed, it would be pointless to develop such a large software system if it could not improve on existing techniques. PDMS contributes to the quality of the design in the following ways: •
Ensures consistent and reliable component data In a conventional design environment, using 2D drawing techniques, the size of each fitting must be decided before it can be drawn. This is a time consuming process that often leads to expensive errors, which are only found during the erection stage of the project. With PDMS, all piping component sizes and geometry are predefined and stored in a catalogue, which cannot be changed by the designer. This ensures that all items are true to size and are consistent throughout the design, no matter how many users there are on the project.
www.aveva.com 13
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Adheres to definable engineering specifications Piping specifications and steelwork catalogues stating precisely the components to be used are compiled for the purpose of ensuring consistent, safe and economic design. Design applications for piping, HVAC, cable trays and steelwork all use specifications to control component selection.
•
Ensures correct geometry and connectivity There are many different ways of making design errors, such as incorrect fitting lengths, incompatible flange ratings, or simple alignment errors. PDMS can check all of these using data consistency procedures built into the system to check all or individual parts of the design model.
•
Avoids component interferences Despite a wealth of skill and experience in plant design, traditional design office techniques are still subject to human error. Laying out complex pipe runs, and general arrangements in confined areas using conventional 2D methods, inevitably leads to clashes between elements, which are trying to share the same physical space. PDMS enables you to avoid such problems in two ways: 1. By viewing the design interactively during the design process, allowing visual checks on the model from different viewpoints and resolves any potential problems as they arise. 2. By using the powerful clash checking facility within PDMS, which will detect clashes anywhere in the plant, this can be done interactively or retrospectively.
•
Annotation and dimensions obtained directly from the Design database Extracted information from the PDMS database, such as arrangement drawings, piping isometrics and reports, will always be the latest available as it is stored only in one source. Through the course of a project, information is constantly changing and drawings need to be reissued. When this happens, drawings, reports etc can be updated and reissued with the minimum of effort.
2.2
How PDMS is Structured
PDMS is divided into a number of functional modules which access the databases for a different purposes. The main modules and their purpose are listed below. • Design
3D Model Design
• Draft
2D Drawing Production
• Isodraft
Isometric Drawing Production
• Admin
Project/User Administration
• Paragon
Catalogue and Specification Construction
• Propcon
Properties Construction
• Lexicon
User Defined Attributes and User Defined Element Type creation
2.2.1
Design
Design is the graphically driven data input module for the 3D model in PDMS. In this module the plant model is built and the data stored in one or more databases. The databases contain a three-dimensional description of all items in the plant. Component selection is provided through specifications that dictate which catalogue components can be used. The main features are: •
Creation of new design elements.
www.aveva.com 14
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Modification of existing design elements.
•
Viewing of the design model interactively by graphical manipulation.
•
Creation of reports, e.g. MTO, weight, C of G, project pricing, project timing, etc.
•
Clash detection to find interferences between design elements.
The Design module has a number of discipline applications and sub-applications to assist discipline designers in building models efficiently. These applications are: • • • • • • •
General Equipment Pipework Cable Trays HVAC Designer Structures Cabling System
2.2.2
Draft
Draft is used to create annotated, dimensioned arrangement and detail drawings. The annotation can be in the form of labels attached to design elements or 2D annotation such as drawing notes, drawing frames, tables, lines, etc. Annotation attached to a design data element on the drawing will move if the 3D position of the element changes. Dimensions are projected distances between connecting points (P-Point) in the 3D design. The dimension itself is calculated automatically and is recalculated every time the drawing is updated. The design database can be interrogated through the drawing database, but it cannot be changed from within the Draft module.
Example DRAFT output
www.aveva.com 15
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
2.2.3
Isodraft
Isodraft produces dimensioned symbolic piping and HVAC isometrics for construction and erection purposes in various formats. Isodraft facilities include: •
Full material lists.
•
Automatic spool identification.
•
Automatic splitting of complex drawings.
•
User-defined drawing sheets.
Example ISODRAFT output
2.2.4
Admin
Large plants designed using PDMS are usually broken down into individual areas (either physical areas or design areas), depending on the size, complexity and configuration of the plant. On a large project, the System Administrator will first agree with Project and Design Management the breakdown of the PDMS project into sections which: • Are relevant to the needs of project reporting and control. • Form reasonable design subdivisions with sensible match-lines and design content. • Enable enough designers to work in parallel with simultaneous access to carry out their design tasks. In much the same way as in a design office (with its section leader, draftspeople, etc.), PDMS has Teams, the members of which are called Users. These Teams can consist of any number of Users and can be organised by discipline or physical work areas.
www.aveva.com 16
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The main features of the Admin module are: • Access Control (Teams and Users) • Databases (DB’s) • Multiple Databases (MDBs) • Database management functionality
2.2.5
Paragon
Paragon is used to create and modify the component catalogue and specifications stored in the Catalogue database. The catalogues in PDMS serve a similar purpose to the manufacturers’ catalogues, which you would refer to when using conventional design methods. The PDMS component catalogue is used to specify the geometry, connection information, obstruction and detailing data of piping, structural, HVAC and cable tray components. Paragon is used to construct the component catalogue just as Design is used to construct the design data. It should be noted that, whereas the design data is specific to a particular design, catalogues and specifications may be specific to a company but general to a number of projects in that company. For example, the same catalogue component may also appear in other designs proceeding at the same time.
2.2.6
Propcon
Propcon is used to input and edit data within the Properties database. The database contains data for materials, e.g. density, Young’s Modulus, expansion coefficients, etc., as well as component data, e.g. component weight, corrosion allowance, wall thickness, etc.
2.2.7
Lexicon
Lexicon enables the definition of User Definable Attributes (UDA) that may be assigned to PDMS elements so that additional information may be stored in the databases and extracted into drawings and reports. In addition, User Defined Element Types (UDET) may be defined to enhance the engineering terminology in the project and differentiate between types of the base element. For example, an EQUI element may be designated as an element type of, say, :PUMP or :EXCHANGER
www.aveva.com 17
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
2.3
PDMS Databases
The heart of PDMS consists of a set of hierarchical databases that store the model data. The database system is called Dabacon and is exclusive to AVEVA. There are several different database types, structured specifically for plant design data storage and each type of database stores different data. Generally, multi-discipline projects are executed using discipline specific designers who will use specific applications in PDMS to construct the model components for their specific discipline. A project, therefore, may consist of a number of Design databases for each discipline. When constructing the model, references are made to catalogue; property and user defined attribute data that is held in different types of databases. As this data is common to all users of each discipline, each user will refer to a common set of data for the project. These databases are called Reference databases. In order that each user can see the required design components modelled by other users and refer to the common catalogue, property and user defined attribute data, the Design and Reference databases are grouped together into a Multiple Database (MDB).
There may be several MDBs for a project, each defining specific groups of databases, for users with different tasks to perform. Databases can be of two types, i.e. Update or Multiwrite and an MDB may contain each type. Update databases allow only one user at a time to work in the database, creating or modifying data held within it. This set-up is easy to administer but on a large project will require a large number of databases. In addition, as only one user at a time can modify the data this may cause a bottleneck on busy project schedules.
Simplified scenario using Update databases Multiwrite databases allow any number of users to work in the database simultaneously, creating and modifying data within it. In order to control the modification of the data, a ‘claim list’ concept is used to avoid
www.aveva.com 18
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
a ‘last saved’ scenario for element modification to occur. Claim lists are discussed in more detail later in the Training Guide.
Simplified scenario using Multiwrite databases
2.4
How data is stored in PDMS
Each hierarchical database is a ‘tree’ like structure similar to the hierarchy of directories and sub-directories used to contain the files on a computer. The topmost data level in all databases is called the WORLD, below which all other data exists.
The PDMS Design Database Hierarchy (part) Each identifiable item of data is known as a PDMS element. Each element has a number of associated pieces of information that, together, completely define its properties. These are known aswww.aveva.com attributes. 19
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
In this hierarchical structure all elements are owned by other elements, with the exception of the WORLD. Elements that are owned by another element, e.g. a ZONE is owned by a SITE, are said to be members of the owning element, e.g. The ZONE is a member of the SITE. The vertical link between two elements on adjacent levels of the database hierarchy is defined as an ownermember relationship. The element on the upper level is the owner of those elements directly below it. The lower level elements are members of their owning element, e.g. a SITE is the owner of a ZONE and the ZONE is a member of a SITE. Each element can have many members, but it can only have one owner. All elements are owned by another element with the exception of the WORLD. Each element may only exist in its correct position in the hierarchy, e.g. a ZONE may not be directly owned by the WORLD, it must be owned by a site. Every element is identified within the database structure by an automatically allocated reference number and, optionally, by a user-specified name. The following sections give descriptions of the main element types in a PDMS Design database. Most of the element types are abbreviated, usually to the first four letters of the full name, when they are displayed in the user interface. The abbreviations are shown in parenthesis.
2.4.1
World (WORL)
When the database is first built, it is empty except for a single element named the WORLD. Each database has its own WORLD element as the first element in the hierarchy. The World cannot be deleted or renamed.
2.4.2
Site (SITE)
Below the WORLD, the second level of the hierarchy is SITE. A SITE may be considered as a significant collection of plant, whose size is not necessarily determined by physical area, but by practical considerations. It may, for example be the whole project, or one part of a large project. You can have as many SITEs within a PDMS project as required for data organisation.
2.4.3
Zone (ZONE)
The next level below a SITE is a ZONE. As with a SITE, a ZONE is not necessarily used to define a physical area, it is more likely to store similar types of items for easy reference, such as a piping system in one ZONE, related equipment in another, and so on. You can have as many ZONEs owned by a site as required for data organisation. SITE and ZONE elements are common to all disciplines. Below ZONE level the hierarchy is discipline dependent, i.e. the elements depend on which discipline you are modelling.
2.4.4
Equipment (EQUI)
Equipment items are built up in PDMS using elements known as primitives. Each piece of equipment can comprise any number of primitive shapes positioned in space to represent the equipment item. The primitives may be owned directly by the EQUI element or by a Sub-Equipment element.
2.4.5
Sub-Equipment (SUBE)
A SUBE is an optional element to sub-divide an EQUI. The SUBE can own primitive elements.
www.aveva.com 20
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
2.4.6
Primitives
Primitives are the basic building blocks of PDMS. They are used by other disciplines to create catalogue components. There are many types of primitives; each with its own features which when combined with other primitives can represent complex shapes. Examples of primitives are nozzle (NOZZ), box (BOX), cylinder (CYLI), pyramid (PYRA), cone (CONE) and dish (DISH).
2.4.7
Volume Model (VOLM)
A VOLM is a ‘simplified’ version of an EQUI element. This allows volumes to be modelled without them being called Equipment items. A VOLM may directly own any primitive except a NOZZ.
2.4.8
Sub-Volume Model (SVOLM)
A SVOLM is an optional element, similar to a SUBE, to sub-divide a VOLM. A SVOLM may own any primitive except a NOZZ.
2.4.9
Structure (STRU)
STRU elements are administrative elements, i.e. they exist to own FRAMEWORK elements, and allow the plant structures to be sub-divided for ease of modelling and reporting.
2.4.10 Framework (FRMW) FRMW elements are used to store structural components in the model. A complex structure can be divided into logical frameworks. Dividing the structure in this way allows structural modelling, and also reporting, to be done more efficiently, e.g. by copying a complete FRMW.
2.4.11 Sub-Framework (SBFR) A SBFR is an optional element that can own structural components. They are used to further sub-divide complex projects or for modelling sub-assemblies within a framework.
2.4.12 Structural Components Structural profiles are represented in PDMS by section (SCTN) elements. Profile sizes are selected using a section specification that references standard catalogue data for section sizes complying with various national standards or company standards. Plate elements are represented by Panel (PANE) elements and curved profiles are modelled using a Generic Section (GENSEC) component.
2.4.13 Pipe (PIPE) Pipes may be considered like lines on a flow sheet. They may run between several end connection points and are usually grouped by a common specification and process.
2.4.14 Branch (BRAN) Branch elements are sections of a pipe, which have known start and finish points. In PDMS the start and finish points are called the Head and Tail. Heads and tails may be connected to Nozzles, Tees or other Heads and Tails, depending on the configuration of the pipe, or left open ended.
www.aveva.com 21
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
2.4.15 Piping Components A Branch may own a wide variety of components such as Gaskets (GASK), Flanges (FLAN), Elbow (ELBO), Tees (TEE), Valves (VALV), etc. These form the shape and geometry of the Branch and ultimately the Pipe itself. Piping components are selected using Piping Specifications that reference standard catalogue data. For example, each time you want to use a 100mm bore elbow, PDMS always accesses the data for it from the component catalogue. The data for these elements remains constant no matter how many 100mm bore elbows are used in the design.
2.5
Element Names in PDMS
Any element in a PDMS database may be given an explicit name. Names enable you to identify elements and to produce meaningful reports from the database. Which elements you name is a matter of choice, however, in general ‘significant elements’, e.g. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, SUBE, PIPE, BRAN, STRU, FRMW, SBFR, etc. would be named. It is not usual for primitives to be named. The WORLD is named /* and cannot be renamed. Element names in PDMS must comply with the following rules: • Element names begin with a forward slash, e.g. /MY_MODEL. Generally, most design items give you the opportunity to name them from the element creation form. You do not have to enter the forward slash on such forms as it is added automatically when the Return (Enter) key is pressed. • Element names must be unique across all databases in the MDB. • Element names are case sensitive, e.g. /P1001A, /P1001a, /p1001A and /p1001a are all valid, and different, names. • Element names must not contain spaces. Any character such as forward slash (/), Underscore (_), hyphen (-), asterisk (*), etc. may be used as separators. • Element names must be no longer than 50 characters. If an element is not explicitly named it receives a system name, e.g. CYLI 2 of EQUI 1 of ZONE 2 of SITE /MY-MODEL. Internally PDMS does not use names to identify elements but a unique database reference number so that an element may be re-named at any time. These reference numbers are never re-used if an element is deleted and are, therefore, remain unique throughout the life of the project. On some forms the reference number is used in place of the system name and will look something like =23584/2152.
2.6
Units
Internally PDMS works in millimetres; however, the current session units may be set to metric or imperial for data input and output. The units may be changed at any time during the session. For metric units the number of decimal places for the output may be specified and for imperial units different output styles are available, i.e. •
Inches – part units expressed as fractions, e.g. 39.3/8
•
Feet & Inches – e.g. 3'- 3.3/8
•
Feet & Inches – e.g. 3'- 3.3/8"
•
Feet & Inches – e.g. 3ft 3 3/8in
www.aveva.com 22
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
2.7
Axis System PDMS uses the right hand rule to express the co-ordinate system and rotation: In Design, the WORLD has a world co-ordinate system whose origin is at X 0, Y 0 and Z 0. PDMS assigns cardinal directions to the X, Y and Z axes, i.e. • X is East • Y is North • Z is Up
Many elements in PDMS have position and rotation attributes. Such elements have there own axis system, conforming to the right hand rule, and the position and orientation are expressed with respect to their owner. Refer to Chapter 6, Attributes, Positioning and Orientation, for information on the Position and Orientation attributes.
www.aveva.com 23
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 24
CHAPTER 3
3
User Interface Basics
This Chapter describes the basics of the user interface including accessing the Design environment, the use of the mouse, menus, forms and toolbars and the Design Explorer.
3.1
Accessing the Design Environment
PDMS may be started by selecting Start>All Programs>AVEVA>PDMS 12.0>Run PDMS from the task bar or from a pre-defined desktop icon. Starting PDMS displays the AVEVA PDMS Login form:
The AVEVA PDMS Login form controls access to PDMS. The available entries for Username are determined by the Project selected and the available entries for MDB are determined by the Username selected. The Project, Username and MDB may be selected via the option arrows adjacent to each textbox.
Each arrow will display an appropriate form from which the selection may be made. Alternatively, the entries may be keyed in with the Return (Enter) key being pressed after each entry.
When a valid Password has been entered the Change button on the AVEVA PDMS Login form is activated which enables the Password to be changed directly by the user. Clicking the button displays the Change Password form where the new password may be entered and confirmed
The required PDMS Module, i.e. Design, Draft, Paragon, etc., may be selected from the pull-down menu. The Restore Views checkbox becomes active once a module has been previously entered. Checking this box will restore the screen layout, including forms and views.
www.aveva.com 25
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.2
Default Screen Layout
The first entry into the Design module displays the default screen layout:
This default layout may be modified to suit individual preferences, e.g. additional forms may added to the layout, forms may be moved and ‘docked’, forms may be pinned/unpinned as required, toolbars may be moved or docked around the edges of the screen. Some of these features are described later in this Chapter. After exiting PDMS or changing to a different module, a subsequent return to the Design module will restore the screen layout as it was left in the previous session.
3.3
Using the Mouse
L
A three button mouse, preferably with a scroll wheel middle button, is required for PDMS. The mouse steers the graphics pointer around the screen and is also used to select or ‘pick’ items by using the mouse buttons. The buttons perform different tasks depending on the type of window, and the position of the mouse pointer in the window. The appearance of the pointer will change according to the type of display item that is underneath it. There are two techniques used when operating the mouse buttons, Clicking and Dragging: • Clicking - the pointer is positioned over a specific point on the screen. Clicking and releasing a mouse button ‘picks’ whatever is displayed at that point on the screen. This technique is generally used for selecting items in graphical views, operating gadgets on forms and for selecting lines in scrollable lists. • Dragging - the pointer is positioned over a specific point on the screen, the mouse button is clicked and held down whilst dragging the pointer to another position on the screen. To complete the operation the button is released at the second position. This technique is mainly used for manipulating the design model in graphical views, moving forms/toolbars around the screen and for operating sub-menus.
www.aveva.com 26
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The functions of each of the three mouse buttons are described below: • Left Mouse Button - The left mouse button is the main button for selecting items. On a graphical view clicking the left mouse button with the pointer over a design element selects the element. In a sequence of menus, dragging with the left mouse button activates the command represented by the highlighted menu option when the button is released. On a form, the effect depends on the type of selections that are being made, e.g. buttons, radio buttons, check boxes, scrollable lists, fold-up panels, etc. • Middle Mouse Button - The principal use of the middle mouse button in the Design module is to manipulate the model in the 3D graphical view. • Right Mouse Button - Clicking the right mouse button displays context pop-up menus, where available. See Chapter 4, Displaying Modelled Elements, for details of using the mouse to manipulate the model in graphical views.
3.4
Using Menus
There are three types of menu in PDMS, Pull-down Menus, Sub-menus and context Pop-up menus.
3.4.1
Pull-Down Menus
Clicking an item on the menu bar with the left mouse button displays the pull-down menu items:
As the pointer is passed over the menu items they are highlighted in turn. Each menu item has one of three options that result in different actions when the option is selected: Options followed by a triangular pointer: Placing the cursor over this type of menu entry displays a sub-menu. Option followed by three dots: When this type of option is highlighted, clicking the left mouse button will require some user input, i.e. selecting an item, entering data in a form, confirming a message, etc. Option shown as plain text: When this type of option is highlighted, clicking the left mouse button will directly perform the action described in the menu item.
L
If, after displaying a pull-down menu, no menu item is required, clicking the left mouse button in a 3D View will dismiss the pull-down menu.
www.aveva.com 27
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Some plain text menu items are toggles, i.e. they turn the selection On or Off. If such a menu option is turned on, a subsequent opening of the menu will display a checkmark next to the item. The checkmark is not displayed if the menu option is Off. Some toggles also have separate buttons on a toolbar which are ‘pressed’ when the menu option is selected:
3.4.2
Sub-menus
Highlighting a menu item that is followed by a triangular pointer displays a sub-menu. Sub-menus may contain any of the three menu options described above, e.g. it is possible to have a Sub-menu of a Sub-menu. If none of the menu items are required, highlighting another option on the pull-down menu will dismiss the Sub-menu. Alternatively, clicking the left mouse button in a 3D View will dismiss the Pull-down as well as the Sub-menu.
3.4.3
Context Pop-up menus
Context Pop-up menus are context sensitive and are accessed by clicking the right mouse button. The menu options depend on where the pointer is located at the time of the mouse click. Context Pop-up menus are available from the 3D Views, Explorers and forms:
www.aveva.com 28
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.5
Using Forms
Forms are used to display information, enter data and to modify data. Forms typically comprise an arrangement of Tabs, Buttons, Text Boxes, Radio Buttons, Checkboxes, Scrollable Lists, Link Labels, Grids and Fold-up Panels, sometimes collectively referred to as gadgets.
Input to a form is usually via a combination of mouse and keyboard, the mouse being used to select the appropriate controls and the keyboard to enter the data. When a form is displayed, settings may be changed, reset to initial values, accepted or cancelled without applying any changes, depending on the design of the form.
3.5.1
Tabs
Tabs are used to change to a new ‘page’ of the form. The current tab is highlighted with a yellow strip along the top of the tab label. A tab is selected by placing the pointer over the tab and clicking the left mouse button.
www.aveva.com 29
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.5.2
Radio Buttons
Radio buttons are combined in groups and only permit one selection of the group to be set ON, i.e. the radio button with the filled dot in the centre. To set a radio button ON move the pointer over the radio button or associated text and click the left mouse button. Turning a radio button on will automatically turn the other radio button(s) in the group OFF.
3.5.3
Checkboxes
A checkbox may be either ON, i.e. a checkmark (tick) is displayed in the box, or OFF, i.e. the box has no checkmark displayed. Checkboxes are not mutually exclusive so any combination of check boxes on a form may be ON or OFF. To change the status of a check box, i.e. to set it ON or OFF, move the pointer over the check box or associated text and click the left mouse button.
3.5.4
Text Boxes
Text boxes enable alphanumeric data, e.g. names, dimensions, values, etc., to be entered. A text box will generally have a label describing, or qualifying, the data required adjacent to it. To enter data into a text box, move the pointer into the box and click the left mouse button. Key in the required data using the keyboard or edit any existing entry as necessary. The Backspace key will clear the box of any content. When complete, acceptance of the input is confirmed the by pressing the Return (or Enter) key. When first displaying a form containing text boxes, the first text box on the form will be current and a text pointer (a vertical bar) will be displayed in the box. A text box often contains a default entry when first displayed. Some text boxes will accept only text or only numeric data, and entries with the wrong type of data will not be accepted.
3.5.5
Scrollable Lists (Options List) A scrollable list, sometimes referred to as an options list) is displays a vertical list of options within a form. If required for the length of the list, a vertical scroll bar is displayed on the right hand side of the list. A horizontal scroll bar may also be displayed along the bottom of the list.
To select an option from a scrollable list, click with the left mouse button on the list or the down arrow to display the list items. Moving the pointer up and down the list highlights each list item in turn. To select a list item click the required selection with the left mouse button. Some scrollable lists allow only a single selection, i.e. selecting any option deselects all others automatically. Other lists allow multiple selections, with all selected options highlighted simultaneously. Multiple selections, where applicable, are made using standard Windows selection functionality, i.e. the Ctrl and Shift keys. To de-select a highlighted option on a multi-item list, click on it again. Repeated clicks toggle a selection on and off.
www.aveva.com 30
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.5.6
Buttons
Buttons may be any size and have either a text label, a sketch (picture) or a solid colour (swatch) within it that conveys the purpose of the button. Each button usually carries a Tooltip to describe the purpose of the button. The button may take direct action when activated, display a form or toggle a setting. When a toggle button is ON it is shown as ‘pressed’. How this is shown depends on the Appearance settings of the Windows Display Properties. Buttons are used by moving the pointer over the button and clicking the left mouse button.
3.5.7
Link Labels Link Labels are text that links one form to another. Link Labels may be active, i.e. the text is underlined when the pointer is moved over it, or inactive, i.e. it is not underlined when the pointer is moved over it. Link labels are used by moving the pointer over an active label and clicking the left mouse button.
3.5.8
Fold-up Panels Fold-up Panels are used to ‘extend’, i.e. reveal more options, large forms. When a Fold-up Panel is hidden it displays a circle button with two ‘down’ arrows on the right hand side of the panel header. Clicking the button opens the panel to reveal the options contained within it. These options may be any of the other gadgets. Once unfolded the circle button on the panel header changes to show two ‘up’ arrows. Clicking the button will fold-up the panel, hiding its contents.
3.5.9
Grids
Grid gadgets appear on forms where data is displayed in rows and columns, similar to a spreadsheet. The grid gadget has the capability of column grouping, column sorting and column filtering; however, the functionality differs between forms that contain these gadgets. The functionality will be explained in detail when encountered in the training guides.
3.5.10 Form Menus Some forms contain a menu across the top of the form. Form menus have the same functionality and options as described previously for menus.
www.aveva.com 31
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.5.11 Actioning Form Inputs Most forms include at least one control button which is used to either: • Enter the command option represented by the current form setting. • Cancel any changes made to the form since initially opened. • Close the form. The OK and Apply buttons enter the current form settings as command inputs, however, the OK button also closes the form whereas the Apply button leaves the form displayed further input. The Cancel and Reset buttons cancel any changes made to the settings of the form. Cancel also closes the form. The Dismiss button simply closes the form. Some forms contain more specific types of control buttons, which carry out particular command options (extensions of the Apply concept); e.g. the Goto, Add and Remove buttons. Where a form does not contain a Dismiss button a Control form menu item is usually provided. This pulldown menu will contain a close option which dismisses the form. Where neither a Dismiss button or Control pull-down menu are provided the form may be dismissed by clicking the Close button on the top right hand side of the form with the left mouse button. This should only be where no other option to dismiss the form is provided.
3.5.12 Alert Forms An Alert form is used to display information such as error messages, prompts and requests for confirmation of changes. The form will usually have to be acknowledged using an OK button before proceeding.
www.aveva.com 32
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.5.13 Dockable Forms Some forms are dockable, i.e. they can be fixed in a particular place on the display. When dockable forms are initially displayed they will dock at their default position. This position may be changed by dragging the form’s banner with the left mouse button. As the form is moved, docking icons are displayed to aid the docking process.
When the form is dragged over one of the docking aids, the docking tool previews the docking position using a shaded area of the display.
www.aveva.com 33
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Once the required docking position has been achieved, releasing the left mouse button will dock the form in the selected position.
If a dockable form is dragged over a previously docked form, additional docking aids for docking the new form over the previous form are displayed. The additional docking aids work in the same way as previously described.
www.aveva.com 34
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
If the central Tab button of the docking aids is used, the form being docked will form a tabbed form with the form(s) it is being dragged over. To separate the forms, the tabbed group must be undocked first and then separated by dragging the tab away from the group.
Once a dockable form has been docked, it may also be pinned and unpinned, i.e. hidden or displayed:
Clicking the Pin (tooltip Auto Hide) button on the form header ‘hides’ the form under the tab in the adjacent edge of the display. Passing the cursor over the tab displays the form which may be used in the normal way. Clicking the Pin button removes the tab and displays the form. If the screen layout has been modified selecting Settings>Reset Windows Layout from the main menu will restore the screen to the previous layout in that session.
www.aveva.com 35
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.6
Using Toolbars
Toolbars group together gadgets, e.g. buttons, scrollable list and text boxes, for a particular set of commands or commands related to common functionality. The gadgets on the toolbars operate in the same way as described previously for forms. Some toolbars, usually those containing common functionality, are displayed by default, whilst others, usually containing more specialised functionality, are displayed as and when required. Toolbars may be selected for display by clicking the right mouse button in the ‘blank’ area adjacent to the main menu to display a list of the available toolbars. The currently displayed toolbars are indicated by the checkbox icon adjacent to the toolbar name. Selecting a toolbar from this list will toggle its display on or off, i.e. add or remove the checkbox icon. Toolbars such as the Equipment Toolbar, Pipework Toolbar, HVAC Designer Toolbar, etc, are displayed when the appropriate application is entered. These toolbars may be displayed at other times but the gadgets contained in them will be inactive. Toolbars such as the Positioning Control toolbar, which is common to all applications, is displayed only when an operation that may use this functionality is selected. All toolbars may be moved by dragging with the left mouse button as per standard Windows functionality. The toolbars may be docked around any edge of the main window and in any configuration. Most toolbars may be dragged from the main window border into another area of the screen layout to form a standalone toolbar. In this mode, the shape and configuration of the toolbar may be modified by dragging its edges.
L 3.7
Toolbars may be customised and new toolbars created, however, this functionality is outside the scope of this training guide.
Command Window
The Command Window enables the user to directly interact with the database(s) by entering valid command syntax to manipulate, create, modify and query any database element. Reports may also be output to the Command Window. The Command Window is a dockable form and is displayed by selecting Display>Command Line… from the main menu.
3.7.1
Entering Command Syntax
After clicking in the Command Window with the left mouse button, valid command line syntax may be entered on to the active line. Command line syntax is executed by pressing the Return (Enter) key. There is no definitive list of command line syntax, however, the Design Reference Manuals, supplied with PDMS, is a useful reference for Command Syntax. Previously entered commands may be recalled to the active line by double-clicking the left mouse button on the required line in the Command Window or by using the up and down arrow cursor keys to step through previous syntax entries until the appropriate line is found. The active line may be edited before executing the command(s). Command line syntax is not case sensitive, except for names.
www.aveva.com 36
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.7.2
Command Window Pop-up Menu
Clicking the right mouse button in the Command Window displays a pop-up menu with the following options: • Copy – this option allows a single highlighted line or multiple highlighted lines to be copied from the Command Window to the clipboard.
• Paste – this option enables single or multiple lines of text, which has been copied to the clipboard from any source, to be submitted for processing in the Command Window. This option will execute each line of the text as a separate command, as if they had been typed into the Command Window. The last line will not be executed but becomes the active line and must be executed manually by pressing the Return key. • Paste as Macro – this option first creates a temporary file containing the copied macro commands and executes this as a macro. This option enables macro syntax, such as error handling to be used. For a large number of commands this option gives better performance, e.g. graphics will only be updated at the end of the macro rather than after each command. • Font Size – this option has a sub-menu that allows the font size in the Command Window to be set to Small, Medium or Large:
• Clear – this option clears the Command Window of all text.
L
Care should be taken when using the Command Window as all commands entered act directly on the database elements. Some operations available from the forms and menus cannot be replicated in the Command Window. Conversely, some operations in PDMS can only be performed via the Command Window.
www.aveva.com 37
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.8
Navigating the Databases
Being able to navigate around the databases and the database hierarchy is an essential part of successfully working with PDMS. The user interface provides several tools to facilitate navigation.
3.8.1
Design Explorer
The Design Explorer is a dockable form that provides a ‘tree’ view of the database elements in the current MDB. Each element’s type is shown, i.e. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, etc., together with its name. Where elements have been explicitly named the name is displayed without the leading forward slash. Elements that have not been explicitly named, e.g. primitives, are displayed with their system generated name. The tree can be expanded and collapsed by using the and icons adjacent to the database elements. The icons are only displayed where the elements own other elements. One element in the Design Explorer will always be highlighted. This is referred to as the Current Element, often abbreviated to CE in forms, menus and documentation. There may only be one Current Element at any one time and most commands, either via the forms and menus or the Command Window act on the CE. Functionality for commands to act on more than one element at a time is explained later in this training guide. Elements that have been created or modified in a Multiwrite database with an explicit claim, or elements that are explicitly claimed, are displayed in bold text in Design Explorer until they are unclaimed.
Elements in Update databases are not displayed in bold text. See section 7.6 – Claimlists in Multiwrite Databases for further information on claim lists.
www.aveva.com 38
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.8.1.1 Design Explorer Filtering As the databases in the current MDB may contain many thousands of elements, the Design Explorer has a filter that, when activated, restricts the display of elements for other disciplines. For example, the current user may be a Piping Designer routing and modelling pipes. By selecting the Piping option from the pull-down at the top of the Design Explorer and activating the filter by checking the Filter checkbox, the Piping elements are left unaffected; however, other discipline elements are restricted.
The Equipment elements only display the Nozzle (NOZZ) primitives, if any, that they own, as the pipe may need to connect to these elements. All other primitives owned by the equipment are not displayed. For Structural elements, no elements below the Framework (FRMW) level are displayed. The other filter options, e.g. Hangers&Supports, Equipment and Structural function in a similar way. The filters cannot be extended or edited.
3.8.1.2 Design Explorer Pop-up Menu
Clicking any element in the Design Explorer with the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu with the following options: • 3D View - this option has a sub-menu and enables elements to be displayed or removed from the 3D View. This functionality is covered in Chapter 4, Displaying Modelled Elements. • Show Attributes – this option displays the Attribute form for the Current Element. See Chapter 6 for details of querying, displaying and modifying attributes.
• Rename – this option displays the Rename form:
www.aveva.com 39
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The element name may be modified by entering a new name in the Name text box and clicking the Apply button. The pull-down menu options are: • Only – renames only the CE • Re-name all – renames the CE members, if any, that have derivative names of the CE. • Un-name – un-names the CE so that its Name attribute is unset. • Delete – this option deletes the Current Element. A confirmation message is displayed before deletion. Clicking the Yes button permanently deletes the CE from the database. Clicking the No button retains the CE. • Add To My Data – This option adds the Current Element to a My Data collection. Refer to Chapter 7 General Utilities, for details of the My Data functionality. • New Explorer – This option creates a new Explorer for the Current Element and below, i.e. all elements owned by the Current Element.
www.aveva.com 40
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The New Explorer option has a context sensitive sub-menu, i.e. its options depend on the element type of the current element. The CE and its owner will always be two of the options, however, significant attributes will also be available, depending on the element. • Copy – this option copies the Current Element to the clipboard. •
Paste – this option copies a valid element from the clipboard to the current location in the Design Explorer, providing it is within the same database, i.e. elements cannot be copied across databases using this functionality. If the element is named, the pasted element is named Copy-of-nnnn, where nnnn is the name of the Current Element. Where more than one copy of a named element is pasted the second and subsequent elements will contain a sequential copy number, e.g. Copy-(2)-of-nnnn, Copy-(3)-of-nnnn, etc. If the element is unnamed, the pasted element is allocated a system name.
L It is possible to copy and paste an element in Design Explorer using Drag & Drop functionality. Holding down the Ctrl key and the left mouse button on the CE and moving the pointer, a line is displayed showing the potential location of the copy. Releasing the left mouse button creates a copy of the CE. The same naming conventions apply as described above.
3.8.1.3 Explorer Settings Selecting Settings>Explorer… from the main menu displays the Explorer Settings form. The form contain check boxes that toggle the following settings: • Auto Collapse Tree – If selected, whenever the user changes CE, any expanded node not containing the selected CE is automatically collapsed. This applies to all active explorers. This option is disabled if Expand to CE is not selected. • Expand to CE – If selected, this option automatically expands the tree when the CE changes (if not already expanded). • Hide non-writable Template Worlds – If selected, this option hides all non-writable Template Worlds in Design Explorer. • Show TUBI/ROD – If selected, this option displays all TUBI and ROD elements in Design Explorer.
L
TUBI and ROD elements are Piping and Cable Tray components respectively. These elements are discussed in the appropriate discipline training guide.
The Draft Explorer section of this form is outside the scope of this training guide. See TM-1002 Drawing Production (Basic) training guide for details of these options.
www.aveva.com 41
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.8.2
Members List The Members list was the pre-cursor to Design Explorer in previous versions of PDMS. Although lacking much of the functionality of Design Explorer it remains a valuable part of the PDMS user interface for database navigation. The Members list is a re-sizeable form that displays the database elements in the current MDB. Unlike Design Explorer, only the CE members and owners are displayed. Clicking on an element in the Members list makes it the CE and the display changes accordingly. The CE is identified by highlighting, blue when selected and grey otherwise (depending on the Windows Settings). An element name may be entered in the text box at the top of the form. Pressing the Return key navigates to the element, if found, and makes it the CE. If the element name is invalid and/or not found a Cannot access element “nnnn” error message is displayed, where “nnnn” is the entered name. The left and right arrows either side of the text box enable up (left arrow) and down (right arrow) navigation from the CE at the same element level, i.e. with an EQUI element as the CE, clicking the right arrow would go to the next EQUI element, if it exists, in the owning ZONE and make it the CE. Clicking the left arrow would go to the previous EQUI element, if it exists, in the owning zone and make it the CE. If there is no previous or next element of the same type a List exhausted for nnnn error message is displayed, where nnnn is the name of the owning element. Selecting the GoTo>Reference… option on the form menu displays the GoTo Reference form: The contents of the form depend on the element type. For some elements, e.g. ZONE, EQUI, etc., limited attributes are displayed. For other elements, e.g. NOZZ, PIPE, BRAN, etc., more attributes are displayed. For elements with Catalogue or Specification References, clicking these attributes with the left mouse button will navigate to them in the GoTo Reference form and the Members list, thus enabling navigation within reference databases.
www.aveva.com 42
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.8.3
History Toolbar This History Toolbar keeps a list of recently visited elements names and is persistent from session to session. The pull-down displays the CE, however, an element name may be entered into the pull-down. As soon as keyboard entry starts the pull-down opens and displays progressively filtered element names from the entire MDB, depending on the characters entered. An element name may be selected at any time from the displayed list to become the CE. If the name does not exist, then an error message is displayed. The incorrect name will remain in the input field until a new current element is selected, thus allowing a mistyped name to be edited without the need to retype the entire name. Subsequent opening of the pull-down will show the element names previously selected by this method. These element names from the pull-down may be selected to become the CE. The left and right arrow buttons adjacent to the pull-down enable backwards (left arrow) and forwards (right arrow) browsing through an historical list the have been the CEs in the current session. Each arrow button contains a control that opens a scrollable list that holds part of the historical list. The Back button list consists of those elements that were CEs before the current CE and the Forward button consists of elements that were CEs after the current CE. The maximum number of lines in either list is 15. Any element name may be selected from the lists to become the CE.
3.9
Deleting Elements from the Databases
Elements may be deleted from the databases in several ways. It is important that deleting a database element will also delete all of the elements in the hierarchy owned by it. For example, if a SITE is deleted, all of the ZONEs owned by it will be deleted and any elements, such as EQUI, STRU, PIPE, etc. owned by the ZONE will also be deleted. Whichever method is used to delete database elements, except the Command Window, PDMS will always issue a confirmation message requiring a positive response from the user before deleting the element(s). If the elements are visible in the 3D View they will be highlighted.
www.aveva.com 43
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
3.9.1
Deleting using Design Explorer Clicking the right mouse button in the Design Explorer displays the pop-up menu that contains a Delete option. Choosing this option displays a confirmation message naming the CE to be deleted. Clicking the Yes button deletes the element.
3.9.2
Deleting using the Main Menu
The main menu Delete pull-down has the following options:
• CE – this option deletes the current element and displays a confirmation message as described above. • Identified – this option deletes elements identified in the 3D View. An element is identified by clicking on it with the left mouse button, which highlights the element in the current highlight colour. Pressing the Esc key terminates the selection process and displays a confirmation message:
• List – this option deletes all the elements in the current list. A confirmation message is displayed naming the list to be deleted. If displayed in the 3D View the elements are highlighted.
For an explanation of Lists and their use, see Chapter 4, Displaying Modelled Elements.
• Name… - this option displays the Name form: The name of a database element may be entered in the Name text box. Clicking the Apply button displays a confirmation message giving the element name.
www.aveva.com 44
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Members – this option has a sub-menu: Selecting the All option from the sub-menu deletes all the members of the current element but does not delete the current element itself. A confirmation message is displayed naming the current element whose members will be deleted.
Selecting the Selection… option from the sub-menu displays the Delete Selection form. The form displays the current element members which may be selected for deletion by clicking them with the left mouse button. Selected members are highlighted. Standard Windows use of the Ctrl and Shift keys enables more than one element to be selected. Clicking the OK button displays a confirmation message naming the element to be deleted. If more than one element is selected a series of confirmation messages, one for each element selected, are displayed.
3.9.3
Deleting using the Default Toolbar
. Clicking the button with left mouse button deletes The Default Toolbar contains a Delete CE button the current element. A confirmation message is displayed, as described in section 3.9.2.
3.9.4
Deleting using the Command Window
The current element may be deleted using the Command Window using the syntax DELETE where is the element type of the current element, e.g. DELETE ZONE, DELETE EQUI, DELETE CYLI, etc. If elements are deleted using this method, no confirmation message is displayed.
3.10 Saving Changes to the Databases – Save Work When changes are made to the design model during a PDMS session, the effects of the changes are applied only to a copy of the design data until the databases are updated. There is no auto-save in PDMS and, therefore, the databases must be updated explicitly by the user. It is advisable to save work regularly to avoid losing design changes in the event of an unforeseen problem. Updating the databases to incorporate the current design changes may be achieved by: • Clicking the Save Work button on the Default Toolbar • Selecting Design>Save Work from the main menu.
.
www.aveva.com 45
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
In either case a confirmation message is displayed. Clicking the Yes button saves the database changes. Database changes may also be saved by entering SAVEWORK in the Command Window. In this case no confirmation message is displayed.
3.11 Updating Databases to Show Other Changes – Get Work Design changes made by the user are shown immediately in the working copies of the databases. Design changes made by other users during your current PDMS session will not be shown in your working copies unless they are updated explicitly. Updating these databases may be achieved by: • Selecting the Get Work button on the Default Toolbar
.
• Selecting Design>Get Work from the main menu. • Entering GETWORK in the Command Window.
L
All databases to which the user has Read access will be updated by the Get Work operation, whereas the Save Work operation affects only those databases to which the user has Write access.
3.12 Undo and Redo Undo and Redo commands are available from the Edit menu on the main menu or from buttons on the Model Editor Toolbar. It is important to understand that these buttons will only undo or redo database changes, unless in Model Editor Mode, i.e. if a position or orientation of an element is modified or an element is added or deleted, these are database changes, whereas, changing the display colour of an element is not a database change. There is no limit to the undo or redo within a Design session, however, any Save Work or Get Work commands issued will clear the undo and redo stacks, i.e. it is not possible to undo beyond the last Save Work. Refer to Chapter 8, Introduction to Model Editor, for information on the use of Undo and Redo in Model Editor Mode.
3.13 On-line Help In addition to the electronic documentation provided with PDMS, on-line help is available from all modules in PDMS via a Help option on the main menu. Pressing the F1 function key at any time displays the help topic for the currently active window.
Selecting Help>Contents or Help>Search from the main menu displays the same tri-pane form but with the focus on the appropriate tab.
www.aveva.com 46
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Contents pane enables the user to browse through the help topics whilst the Search tab lets the user search for help by performing a key words search. The Help>About option displays information about the current version of PDMS being used.
3.14 Leaving PDMS To leave a PDMS session select Design>Exit from the main menu. If changes have been made to the databases a Question alert message is displayed asking whether the changes are to be saved or not. Clicking the Yes button saves the changes and exits PDMS, clicking the No button doesn’t save the changes and exits PDMS and clicking the Cancel button aborts the exit command. Where no changes have been made to the databases a Confirmation alert is displayed. Clicking the Yes button exits PDMS and clicking the No button aborts the exit command.
www.aveva.com 47
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 1 Entering PDMS
L
The Trainer may supply different login details to the following.
Double click the Run PDMS desktop icon or select Start>All Programs>AVEVA>PDMS 12.0>Run PDMS to display the AVEVA PDMS Login form. Click the arrow button adjacent to the Project textbox to display the PDMS Projects form:
Select Training from the projects grid. The form will dismiss and the project name will be displayed on the login form. Click the arrow button adjacent to the Username textbox to display the Select User form: Scroll down to find, and then click, the A.EQUIPMAN entry on the form grid. The form will dismiss and the user name will be displayed on the login form.
Enter A (upper case) in the Password textbox and press the Return key.
www.aveva.com 48
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Click the arrow button adjacent to the MDB textbox to display the Select MDB form: Scroll down to find, and then click, the AEQUIPMENT entry on the form grid. The form will dismiss and the MDB name will be displayed on the login form.
Select the arrow button on the Module options list and select Design from the displayed list. The module is displayed on the login form.
Click the OK button on the AVEVA PDMS Login form.
www.aveva.com 49
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Splash screen is displayed while PDMS is loading. After a short time PDMS is opened with the default screen layout:
Manipulating the Display Many of the forms and menus can be positioned, resized and docked on the screen as required. These positions will be remembered for the next time you enter AVEVA PDMS. The windows are moved and docked using standard windows mouse commands. • Click and hold with the left mouse button on the Design Explorer title bar and move the cursor to undock the form. Note the displayed docking icons. Try docking the Design Explorer in various positions. • Select Display> Members… from the main menu to display the Members form. Resize the form by dragging the edges/corners as required and move it to a suitable location, noting that it is not a dockable form, i.e. the docking icons are not displayed when it is moved. • Right click in the empty area to the right of the main menu to display the list of available toolbars, noting the ones that are checked, i.e. displayed. Select the Positioning Control option and note the appearance of the toolbar, although it is inactive. • Click and hold with the left mouse button over the left hand edge (four vertical dots) to display the standard Windows move icon. Drag the toolbar onto the 3D graphics view. Try docking different toolbars around the edges of the display. Accessing Applications The default application in Design is the General application. Other Design module applications are accessed from the main menu.
www.aveva.com 50
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Click the Design item on the main menu with the left mouse button to display the menu options. • Move the pointer to highlight the Equipment… item on the menu and then select by clicking the left mouse button. The Equipment application is loaded, as indicated by the main window banner. • Note the change in the main menu and toolbars. These are specific items for the Equipment Application. • Select other applications from the Design menu and note the changes in the main menu and toolbars. Navigating the Hierarchy • In Design Explorer click on the icon adjacent to the TRA.SITE entry and note how the tree view expands to show the ZONEs owned by the SITE. • Expand the ZONE entries to show the members of each ZONE and note the element types contained within. • Expand some of the different element types in the ZONEs to see what type of elements they own. • Click on each of the PIPE elements in the ZONE to make each one the current element. • Left click on the down arrow adjacent to the left arrow on the History toolbar to display the list of previously current elements.
With the list open press the P key and note that the highlighted entry is the first PIPE in the list. Press the P key several times and note that the list steps through the entries whose name begins with P. • Use the Forward and Backwards arrows and their associated history list to navigate in Design Explorer. • Select the Piping entry in the Design Explorer filter options list with the left mouse button and left click the Filter checkbox to activate it. This will auto-collapse the Design Explorer tree.
Double left click the Design WORL * entry to expand it, followed by the TRA.SITE, PIPE.ZONE, pipe2 and pipe2-b1 elements to show the branch components. Note that all of the pipe components are displayed. • Expand the EQUIP.ZONE and the PUMP1 elements. Note that only the nozzle elements are displayed as they relate to piping. Note in the Members list the other primitives that make up the equipment. • Expand the STRUC.ZONE, TANK2-STRU and /TANK-FRMW • TANK2-FRMW elements. Note that no members are shown below the FRMW level as no elements relate to piping. Note in the Members list the other primitives that make up the framework. • Use the Equipment and Structural filters and note the resulting display in Design Explorer on different element types. • Left click on the Design WORL * element at the top of the Design Explorer. On the Members form left click the TRA.SITE entry and then any of the ZONE elements. Note the differences between the display of the Members list and the Design Explorer and how the Design Explorer and Members list track the current element when the other is used.
www.aveva.com 51
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Select Control>Close from the Members form menu to close the form. Copying Elements with Design Explorer •
Right click on TANK1 in Design Explorer to make it the CE and display the pop-up menu. Select the Copy option and then right click on TANK2 to display the pop-up menu again, this time selecting the Paste option. Note that a copy of TANK1 has been created and named Copy-of-TANK1, after the CE, i.e. TANK2.
•
Right click on PIPE.ZONE and select Paste from the pop-up menu. Note that a further copy of TANK1, named Copy-(2)-of-TANK1, has been created in the different ZONE.
•
Hold down the Ctrl key and click and hold down with the left mouse button on PUMP1 in Design Explorer. Drag the pointer, still holding down the Ctrl key and the left mouse button, in Design Explorer noting the displayed line. At a suitable place in the hierarchy simultaneously release the key and the left mouse button. Note that a copy of TANK2, named Copy-of-TANK2 has been created at the selected position.
Deleting Elements •
Make Copy-of-TANK1 the CE. Click on the Delete CE button on the main menu and click the Yes button on the subsequent confirmation message.
•
Right click on Copy-(2)-of-TANK1. Select Delete from the pop-up menu and click the Yes button on the subsequent confirmation message.
•
Make Copy-of-TANK2 the CE. Select Delete>CE from the main menu and click the Yes button on the subsequent confirmation message.
•
Click the Undo button on the Model Editor Toolbar. The last deletion is undone and the element Copof-TANK2 restored to Design Explorer. In the Command Window enter DELETE EQUI and press the Return key. Note that there is no confirmation message of the deletion.
Multiple Design Explorers • Right click on the EQUI.ZONE element in Design Explorer to make it the CE and display the Design Explorer pop-up menu. Select the New Explorer option and note that a new Explorer, labelled EQUIP.ZONE Explorer(1) is created. • Right click on PUMP1 in the newly created explorer to display the pop-up menu and again select the New Explorer option to create another explorer labelled PUMP1 Explorer(2). • Left click TANK1 in the main Design Explorer and note that it highlights the element in that explorer and in the EQUI.ZONE explorer. Left click on PUMP1 in the main Design Explorer and note that it is highlighted in all three explorers. Saving Work Click the Save Work button on the Default Toolbar or select Design>Save Work from the main menu.
www.aveva.com 52
CHAPTER 4
4
Displaying Modelled Elements
This chapter describes how to view the required model elements; set the view limits and set the viewing direction. In order to view the design in a 3D View, the basic things to consider are: •
Which elements are required to be viewed, i.e. Building the Drawlist.
•
Scaling the required elements to fit the 3D View, i.e. Setting the View Limits.
•
Which direction are the elements to be viewed from, i.e. Setting the View Direction.
4.1
Building the Drawlist
PDMS uses the concept of a Drawlist, i.e. a list of database elements to be displayed. All elements in the Drawlist must exist in the databases, i.e. they can be seen in Design Explorer. However, not all database elements need be in a Drawlist, thus making the Drawlist a very powerful tool for viewing the model. Before any element can be displayed in a 3D View it must be added to a Drawlist. The Drawlist may consist of a single element, e.g. an EQUI, a number of items, e.g. an EQUI and some PIPEs, a complete SITE or the whole model. When elements are added to a Drawlist, any element that is a member of the added element, i.e. elements owned by the added element, are also added to the Drawlist. Elements may be added or removed from a Drawlist at any time during a Design session.
4.1.1
Populating the Drawlist Form
Right clicking on the Pick Object to Hide – or – Right Click for Drawlist Options button on the left hand side of the 3D View displays the Drawlist Options pop-up menu. Selecting the Drawlist… option displays the Drawlist form:
www.aveva.com 53
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Elements may be added and removed from the Drawlist in several ways, as described in the following sections. If elements are added to the Drawlist, by any method, that are already present in the Drawlist, they are not added again.
4.1.1.1 By Drag & Drop from Design Explorer Elements may be dragged from the Design Explorer and dropped into a 3D View. Clicking an element in the Design Explorer with the left mouse button, which makes it the CE, and dragging it into a 3D View populates the Drawlist. If the CE is a component or primitive the owning element is added to the 3D View. However, if the Ctrl key is pressed during the drag operation, only the component or primitive will be added to the 3D View. If the added elements are the first elements to be added to an empty Drawlist, the display zooms to the limits of the elements. Subsequent additions to the Drawlist do not affect the limits of the display.
4.1.1.2 From the Default Toolbar The Default Toolbar contains two buttons, one for adding elements to the Drawlist and one for removing elements. Clicking the Add CE to Drawlist button will add the current element to the Drawlist and the 3D View. Clicking the Remove CE from Drawlist will remove the current element from the Drawlist and the 3D View.
4.1.1.3 From Design Explorer
Clicking the CE in Design Explorer with the right mouse button displays the Design Explorer pop-up menu, as described earlier in this training guide. The 3D View option has a sub-menu that has the following options:
• Add – this option adds the CE to the 3D View, with all the elements it owns.
L
If the CE is a primitive, the owning element is added to the 3D View.
• Add Only – this option adds only the CE to the 3D View. • Add Connected – this option adds the CE and any elements connected to it to the 3D View. How elements are connected varies depending on the discipline and is outside the scope of this training guide. Refer to specific discipline training guides for element connectivity. • Add Within Volume – this option adds the CE and any elements that are partially or wholly within a ‘volume box’ whose size is derived from the extremities of the CE to the 3D View.
www.aveva.com 54
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Remove – this option removes the CE from the 3D View, with all the elements it owns.
L
If the CE is a primitive, the owning element is removed from the 3D View.
• Remove Only – this option removes only the CE from the 3D View. • Highlight – this option highlights the CE in the designated highlight colour. Another element needs to be made the CE before the highlighting is displayed; this is because the designated CE colour is dominant. Element colours are detailed in Chapter 5 - Working with 3D Views. • Unhighlight – this option un-highlights the CE.
4.1.1.4 From the Command Window Entering ADD CE in the Command Window will add the current element to the Drawlist and the 3D View. Names may also be used to explicitly add named elements to the Drawlist, e.g. ADD /EQUIP will add the Zone named /EQUIP while ADD /E1301 /C1101 /D1201 will add all the named elements. The element type may also be used with the syntax, i.e. ADD ZONE while the CE is the Zone or any member of the Zone will add the Zone to the Drawlist Similarly, entering REM CE in the Command Window removes the current element from the Drawlist and the 3D display. The same syntax can be used to remove one or more named elements or the element type. Entering REM ALL in the Command Window removes every element from the Drawlist and empties the 3D View.
L
Which ever methodis used to populate the Drawlist, the form updates (refreshes) automatically providing the Track changes checkbox is checked. If it is not checked the Drawlist will not update with changes to the Drawlist until the checkbox is checked.
www.aveva.com 55
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
4.1.2
Using the Drawlist Form
The Drawlist is a re-sizable and dockable form that has many features to help control the Drawlist for a 3D View. The form has, essentially three areas as described in the following sections:
4.1.2.1 Tabs and Grid Gadgets The top part of the form consists of three tabs, each of which has a grid gadget: • The Drawlist tab displays all the elements currently in the Drawlist. • The Graphical Selection tab displays all elements in the current graphical selection. • The Primitives tab displays the primitives of an element selected from the Drawlist tab list. The tab header changes to Primitives of /nnnn, where nnnn is the name of the element, when an element is selected from the Drawlist tab. If more than one element is selected in the Drawlist tab, the first primitives of the first element selected will appear in the Primitives tab and the tab titled appropriately changed. The grid gadgets in each tab have the same functionality. Each grid has two columns showing the element Name, either an explicit name or the system generated name, and the element Type. The grid entries may be grouped, sorted and filtered to suit the user’s requirements, as described below: • Grouping
Dragging a column header with the left mouse button into the area labelled ‘Drag a column here to group by that column’ groups the grid data by the chosen column. The groups may be expanded and collapsed by double clicking the group headers with the left mouse button or using the + and – buttons respectively adjacent to the group headers.
www.aveva.com 56
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Sorting The grid data can be sorted alpha-numerically, either ascending (default) or descending, by clicking the column header with the left mouse button. Once clicked a small icon is displayed in the right hand side of the column header to indicate ascending and descending. The grid data may only be sorted on one column at a time.
• Filtering Clicking the Filter button in the top left hand corner of each column displays a filter sub-menu and opens the textbox to the right of the button. The filter options are comprehensive and selfexplanatory. Having selected an appropriate filter, text may be entered into the textbox. The grid data is progressively filtered depending on the characters entered. The filter text is not case sensitive.
The grid data may be filtered on more than one column and filtered data may be sorted, as described above. Filters are removed by clicking the clear button at the top right hand corner of the column. If more than one column is filtered each column filter must be removed separately.
4.1.2.2 Drawlist Pop-up Menu Clicking with the right mouse button on any element in any of the tab grids displays the Drawlist pop-up menu which has the following options:
L More than one element may be selected from the grid tabs using the Ctrl or Shift keys in combination with the left mouse button, as in standard Windows operations. • Navigate To – this option navigates to the element, selected in the list, in the Design Explorer, effectively making it the current element. Where more than one element is selected this option navigates to the first one in the list.
www.aveva.com 57
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Hide – this option hides the selected element(s) from the 3D View. The elements are not removed from the Drawlist, only removed from the graphics display. The Show checkbox in the Display Settings area of the form is unchecked. • Show – this option shows the selected elements(s) in the 3D View, if they have been hidden. The Show checkbox in the Display Settings area of the form is checked. • Remove – this option removes the selected element(s) from the Drawlist. • Add to My Data – this option adds the selected element(s) to My Data.
4.1.2.3 Select, Add and Remove buttons Below the tabs and grid gadgets on the Drawlist form are three buttons that perform the following functions: This button selects the CE, as shown in Design Explorer, in the selected tab list and highlights the entry. If the CE is not in the selected tab list then a warning alert form is displayed. This button adds the current element, as shown in Design Explorer, to the Drawlist. This may be a significant element, a component or a primitive. This button removes the selected row(s) from the Drawlist. The other tabs are updated automatically. This button is only enabled when one or more rows in any of the tab grids has been selected.
4.1.2.4 Display Settings The Display Settings area of the form enables single elements or multiple elements selected in the tab grids to have their visual properties in the 3D View modified.
L
When the display settings of a top level element in the Drawlist are modified, all lower level elements owned by this element are also modified, however, individual primitives may have their display settings changed from their owner’s colour by making a selection from the Primitives of tab.
The available settings are described below: If unchecked, the Show checkbox hides the selected item(s) in the 3D View. Checking the box displays the object in the 3D View, if hidden. The Colour button shows the colour of the selected element(s) and displays its colour name. If more than one element is selected the colour of the first element selected is shown, although the operation will change the colour of all selected elements. Clicking the Colour button displays the Colour form which displays the standard 50 PDMS colours. Any colour may be selected from the palette by clicking the required colour button. The name of the colour is displayed at the bottom of the form. When a colour is selected the Colour button on the Drawlist form is updated. The Colour form may then be dismissed. The selected elements on the Drawlist form will be displayed in the new colour.
www.aveva.com 58
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Translucency slider enables the translucency of elements to be modified. Setting the translucency of displayed elements allows other elements that are obscured in the display to be seen through the translucent element. The number next to the slider label shows the percentage of translucency for the selected item(s), i.e. 0% is a solid colour and 100% is completely transparent. The percentage may be set by dragging the slider with the left mouse button or by clicking the left (lower) or right (higher) arrow buttons at each end of the slider until the desired number is reached. If more than one element is selected the colour of the first element selected is shown, although the operation will change the colour of all selected elements
If checked, the ‘edges’ of the element(s) are displayed in the 3D View. This setting is often used with semi-translucent elements to ensure a clearer view of the element(s).
4.1.3
Additional Drawlist Functions
Other functions that affect the Drawlist and the visual properties of displayed elements are described in the following sections.
4.1.3.1 Pick Object to Hide Button An object may be hidden, i.e. removed from the display but not from the Drawlist, by left clicking on the Pick Object to Hide button and selecting an element in the 3D View. In multi-pick sequence, say for defining a limits box graphically, an object requiring to be picked may be obscured by another element. Left clicking the Pick Object to Hide button sets the graphical view so that the next 3D object picked will be hidden. This has the effect of temporarily suspending any current multi-pick sequence and allowing the obscuring object to be picked. This will cause the picked object to be hidden whereupon the multi-pick sequence will be restored, allowing the user to complete the sequence
4.1.3.2 Drawlist Options Pop-up Menu
Right clicking on the Pick Object to Hide button on the left side of the 3D View displays the Drawlist Options pop-up menu. The following options are applicable to this chapter:
www.aveva.com 59
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Show Last Hidden Object(s) – this option re-shows the object(s) most recently hidden in the current session, providing they are still in the Drawlist. • Show All Hidden Objects – this option re-shows all objects hidden in the current session, providing they are still in the Drawlist. • Show Hidden Objects… - this option displays the Hidden Objects form that enables the user to select objects to re-show. The Hidden Objects form contains a grid gadget that displays all objects that are currently hidden. The objects may be grouped, filtered and sorted in the same way as the Drawlist form. The Show Objects button becomes active when a single selection or multiple selections are made. Left clicking the button re-shows the objects in the 3D View. The Refresh button updates the grid list.
See Chapter 5, Working with 3D Views, for details of the remaining options.
4.1.3.3 Element Pop-up Menu Right clicking an element in the 3D View will display the element pop-up menu. The Hide option hides the graphical selection from the 3D View. The Remove from 3D View removes the graphical selection from the Drawlist and the 3D View. Refer to Chapter 5, Working with 3D Views, for information on graphical selections.
www.aveva.com 60
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
4.2
Setting the View Limits
In order to display items in the 3D View, whether it is a single item, a selection of items or an entire model, the elements have to be scaled to fit the view. Scaling of the items is performed automatically by PDMS once the limits of the items to be displayed are known. The limits of an item, or a selection of items, can be thought of as a box completely encapsulating the item(s) to be viewed.
There are several ways by which the elements to be viewed can be scaled to fit the 3D View:
4.2.1
Using the View Control Buttons
The view limits may be manipulated using some of the View Control buttons on the left hand side of a 3D View. Left clicking the Limits CE & Options button sets the view limits to the current element. Clicking the Zoom to Selection button sets the view limits to the current graphical selection. If there is no current graphical selection the CE is used as the selection. Clicking the Walk to Drawlist button sets the view limits and centres the view to the contents of the Drawlist.
Right clicking the Limits CE & Options button displays a sub-menu. The following options are applicable to setting the view limits. The other options will be explained later in this training guide.
• Obstruction – this option sets the view limits to the elements contained in the Obstruction List. This list is primarily used for clash detection but may be used for this purpose. • Clipbox – this option sets the view limits to the same co-ordinates as the current Clipbox, if defined. See section 5.8 for information on Clipping.
www.aveva.com 61
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Explicit… - this option displays the Volume Design [1] form:. This form enables a limits box to be set from a volume which is specified by defining two diagonally opposed corners of a 3D box. The From and To co-ordinates may be specified • manually - by entering values in the text boxes • graphically – by selecting two elements • from the Select form menu that has the following options: CE – this option sets the limits box to the extremities of the CE. Owner – this option sets the limits box to the extremities of the owner of the CE. Pick – this option sets the limits box to the extremities of an element picked in the 3D View. Pick Owner – this option sets the limits box to the extremities of the owner of an element picked in the 3D View. • Restore – this option restores the previous limits after a zoom. • Look Explicit… - this option looks in an explicitly defined direction Refer to Chapter 5, Working with 3D Views.
4.2.2
Using the View Menu Selecting either View>Zoom To or View>Walk To from the main menu displays a sub-menu whose options set the view limits. • Selection – this option sets the view limits to the current graphical selection or to the CE if there is no current graphical selection. • Identify Element… - this option enables an element to be selected graphically from the 3D View. In this case, the selected element does not become the CE. • Entire Draw List – this option sets the view limits to the extremities of the entire Drawlist. Walk To differs from Zoom To in that it removes items between the eye position and the target item that are not in the immediate vicinity of the target item. Items in the immediate vicinity of the target will continue to be displayed, so it may be necessary to remove items still obscuring the target item by removing them from the Drawlist.
www.aveva.com 62
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
4.2.3
Using the 3D View Pop-up Menu Right clicking in any blank area of a 3D View, i.e. the cursor is not over a element, displays the 3D View pop-up menu. The menu contains Zoom To and Walk To options, with sub-menus, as described for the View pull-down on the main menu. The other options on this menu are described elsewhere in this training guide.
4.2.4
Using the Element Pop-up Menu Right clicking an element in the 3D View will display the element pop-up menu. The menu contains Zoom To and Walk To options that use the current graphical selection. Refer to Chapter 5, Working with 3D Views for information on graphical selections.
4.3
Setting the View Direction
Although the model may be viewed form any direction, functionality is provided for setting the viewing direction to pre-defined and explicit directions and is described in the following sections.
4.3.1
Using the View Menu
The following options on the View menu relate to setting the view direction: • View>Look The Look option sub-menu contains the six cardinal viewing directions. Selecting a direction views the contents of the 3D View in that direction, i.e. selecting North views the model from the South, looking North.
www.aveva.com 63
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• View>Plan The Plan option sub-menu contains four cardinal directions. Selecting a direction displays a plan view of the model with the selected direction pointing up in the 3D View.
• View>Isometric The Isometric option sub-menu contains four pre-set isometric view directions. Each direction corresponds to North towards bottom right, top right, top left and bottom left of the 3D View.
www.aveva.com 64
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
4.3.2
Using the 3D View Pop-up Menu
Right clicking in any blank area of a 3D View, i.e. the cursor is not over a element, displays the 3D View pop-up menu. The menu has the same Look, Plan and Isometric options as the 3D with the same functionality.
The current viewing direction is displayed in the Status bar on a 3D View:
A direction of n90d, i.e. North 90º Down, is the default viewing direction and is the direction obtained when selecting Plan>North. A direction of e45n35d, i.e. East 45º North 35º Down, is the direction obtained when selecting Isometric>Iso 3. A direction of n90d is the default viewing direction and is the direction obtained when View >Plan>North is selected.
www.aveva.com 65
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 2 Building the Draw List • Right click on the Select Object to Hide – or – Right Click for Drawlist Options button on the left side of the 3D View and select the Drawlist… option from the pop-up menu to display the Drawlist form. Dock the Drawlist on the bottom of Design Explorer. Note that the Drawlist is empty as no components have been added to the 3D View. • Check the Track Changes checkbox at the top right of the Drawlist form. • In Design Explorer expand the TRA.SITE element to show the ZONE elements and expand the EQUIP.ZONE element. • Highlight the equipment item TANK1 and Drag and Drop it into the 3D View. Note that the equipment element has been added to the 3D View and the view limits adjusted to the element. • Highlight the equipment item PUMP1 in Design Explorer and click the Add CE to Drawlist button from the Default Toolbar to add the equipment to the Drawlist. • Right click the EQUIP.ZONE element in Design Explorer to display the Design Explorer pop-up menu. Select 3D View>Add from the sub-menu to add the ZONE to the Drawlist. Note that only the equipment element TANK2 has been added to the Drawlist. As the other equipment items owned by the EQUI.ZONE were already in the Drawlist only the remaining equipment item has been added. • TANK2 cannot be seen in the 3D View as the display limits were set around TANK1. Click the Walk to Draw List button elements.
on the left side of the 3D View. The limits are now set to all of the equipment
• Right click on TANK1 in Design Explorer and select 3D View>Add Connected from the sub-menu. This will add pipe1-b1 to the 3D View as the pipe is connected to the equipment item. • Right click on TANK2 in Design Explorer and select 3D View>Add Within Volume from the pop-up menu. This adds pipe2-b1 and some of the SCTN (Section) elements that make up the TANK2 supports to the 3D View as they are within the volume of the equipment item. • Make the PIPE.ZONE element the Current Element (CE) by left clicking it in Design Explorer and click the Add CE to drawlist button on the Drawlist form to add the remainder of the pipe branches to the 3D View. • Display the Command Line Display > Command Line… Make the STRUC.ZONE the CE and in the Command Window enter ADD CE and press the Return key. • Add the CIVIL.ZONE to the Drawlist using any method.
www.aveva.com 66
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The 3D View should now look like this: -
Setting the View Limits • Clear the Drawlist by left clicking the top entry in the Drawlist form grid, holding down the Shift key and left clicking the bottom entry in the grid, using the scroll bar if necessary, to highlight all Drawlist entries (alternatively left click on any item in the grid and then press the Ctrl and A buttons to select all entries). Right click in the grid to display the Drawlist pop-up menu and select the Remove option. • Add the TRA.SITE to the Drawlist and remove the EQUI.BASE element by right clicking on it in the 3D View to make it the CE and display the element pop-up menu and selecting the Remove from 3D View option. • Select View>Walk To>Entire Draw List from the main menu and note that the elements in the Drawlist now fill the 3D View. • Right click on TANK1 in the 3D View to make it the CE (check in Design Explorer) and display the element pop-up menu. Select the Walk To option from the menu and note that the equipment element now fills the 3D View. • Left click on any visible part of PUMP1 in the 3D View to make it the CE and left click the Zoom to Selection button on the left side of the 3D View. Note that the pump now fills the view. • Display the entire Drawlist again by right clicking anywhere in a blank area of the 3D View to display the 3D View pop-up menu and select the Walk To>Entire Draw List entry. • Navigate to TANK2 in Design Explorer to make it the CE and right click the Limits CE & Options button on the left side of the 3D View. Select the Explicit… option from the pop-up menu to display the Volume form. Select the Select>CE option from the form menu and note the volume box that is displayed around the extents of TANK2. Click the Apply button to set the view volume. The equipment item now fills the 3D View. Click the Dismiss button to clear the volume box and dismiss the form.
www.aveva.com 67
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Setting the View Direction • Add the EQUI.BASE element to the Drawlist and click the Walk to Draw List button to view the entire Drawlist contents. • Note the view direction in the Status bar in the bottom left corner of the 3D View. It should read n 90 d, i.e. North 90º Down, a plan view with the North direction going up the 3D View. Select View>Isometric>ISO 3 from the main menu. Note the change in the view direction on the Status bar. • Right click anywhere in a blank area of the 3D View to display the 3D View pop-up menu. Select Isometric>Iso 1, Iso 2 and Iso 4 in turn, noting the change to the 3D View and the view direction in the Status bar. • Select View>Look>North from the main menu to display the southern elevation of the model. Note that the view direction has changed to n, i.e. North. Select the different options from either the View>Look menu on the main menu or 3D View pop-up menu, noting how the view changes. • Select View>Plan>North from the main menu. Note that the view direction has changed to n 90 d, the default viewing direction. Select the different options from either the View>Plan menu on the main menu or 3D View pop-up menu.
www.aveva.com 68
CHAPTER 5
5
Working with 3D Views
The previous chapters have introduced the concept of the 3D View, described how to display model elements and control the content, view limits and viewing direction of a 3D View. This chapter describes additional functionality of 3D Views including modes of operation, graphical selections, multiple, local and clone views, model manipulation, model representation, view clipping, colours and graphical settings.
5.1
Modes of Operation in 3D Views
3D Views in Design may be used in one of three modes of operation: • Navigate Mode – (default setting) in this mode 3D Views allow an element to be selected simply by clicking on it, which navigates to it in the database and makes it the CE. In this mode, the prompt bar across the top of the 3D View contains the prompt Navigate: • Event Driven Graphics (EDG) Mode – in this mode mouse pointer picks are used as part of an event driven graphics routine. The user is invited to perform a graphical pick on an element or a graphical feature in the displayed model. The prompt bar contains an instruction which prompts the user to perform a graphical selection. • Model Editor Mode - in this mode one or more selected elements can be moved or rotated dynamically by dragging with the mouse pointer. The prompt bar contains the prompt Modify
L
Model Editor Mode cannot be entered whilst in EDG mode, and vice versa. Refer to Chapter 8, Introduction to Model Editor, for information on operations in Model Editor Mode.
5.2
Graphical Selections
Visible items in a 3D View may be grouped together to form a Graphical Selection which are used in a variety of ways in PDMS. Items that form a graphical selection are highlighted with a solid green line around the extremities of the constituent parts of the item(s). Items may be added to or removed from the current Graphical Selection by: • selecting them individually. • dragging a rectangular fence around items to be selected. • using selection operations to select related groups of items.
5.2.1
Selecting Items Individually
Clicking on an item in the 3D View with the left mouse button makes it the CE and creates a new Graphical Selection containing that one item. The Ctrl key is used to add unselected items to the current selection or remove selected items from the Graphical Selection. • Holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on an unselected item will add it to the current Graphical Selection. • Holding down the Ctrl key and clicking on a selected item removes it from the current Graphical www.aveva.com Selection. 69
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.2.2
Fence Selection
A group of items may be selected by using a fence selection which has two selection options: • Wholly Within – this option selects items that are entirely contained inside the rectangular boundary of a fence. • Wholly and Partially Within – this option selects both items that are entirely contained inside the rectangular boundary of a fence, and items that cross the boundary. The selection may be made by: • Selecting Selection>Select Rectangle from the main menu and choosing from the sub-menu. • Using the right mouse button to define the fence, see below. A fence is defined by clicking in an empty space in the 3D View, i.e. not with the cursor over an item, to specify one corner of the fence rectangle and then dragging the mouse pointer to the opposite corner of the rectangle and releasing the mouse button. Dragging the fence with the left mouse button selects the items in the fence, depending on the ‘Within’ setting.
Dragging a fence with the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu when the mouse button is released. The ‘Within’ option may be selected from the pop-up menu. The Cancel option aborts the fence selection process. Pressing the Esc key also aborts the fence selection.
Holding down the Ctrl key, while making a fence selection, adds the selected item(s) to the current Graphical Selection, if the selected item(s) are not already part of it. Holding down the Shift key, while making a fence selection, removes the selected item(s) from the current Graphical Selection, if the selected item(s) are in it
5.2.3
Clearing the Graphical Selection
Clicking in a blank space in the 3D View with the left mouse button clears the Graphical Selection.
Right clicking on one of the elements in the current Graphical Selection displays the element pop-up menu. Selecting the De-Select All option clears the Graphical Selection. Selecting De-Select Current removes the element that was clicked on from the current Graphical Selection.
www.aveva.com 70
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.2.4
Reinstating the Previous Graphical Selection
If a Graphical Selection has been lost accidentally by clearing the selection or by starting a new selection, the previous selection can be reinstated by selecting Edit>Re-Select from the main menu.
5.3
Navigate to Element Button
The Navigate to Element button on the Utilities Toolbar Navigate and EDG modes.
affects the way graphical picking works in
If the function is on then in Navigate mode selecting, say, an equipment item will make the selected primitive the CE, rather than creating a Graphical Selection of the equipment item, i.e. it is not possible to create a Graphical Selection in Navigate mode with the Navigate to Element function on. Navigate to Element and Model Editor Mode are mutually exclusive. Model Editor Mode cannot be entered while Navigate to element is on and the Model Editor button on the Utilities Toolbar is greyed out. Whilst in Model Editor Mode, clicking the Navigate to Element button will exit Model Editor. Navigate to Element also affects the Navigation Level in the Equipment Application. See section 9.2.6 for details of the Navigation Level options in the Equipment Application.
www.aveva.com 71
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.4
Multiple, Local and Clone Views
PDMS provides the ability to view the model in multiple 3D Views; however, the number of views will probably be limited by the physical size of your display device.
5.4.1
Multiple Views
Additional 3D Views may be created in two ways: • Selecting Display>Graphical View from the main menu creates a new 3D View. • Selecting Display>View Control… from the main menu displays the 3D View Control form. The 3D View Control form enables 3D Views to be created, deleted, the background colour changed and graphical settings defaults made for new views. The grid shows all of the current 3D Views. The views are numbered sequentially with the default view being labelled 3D View (1) and subsequent additional views would be labelled 3D View (2), 3D View (3), etc. These labels appear on the 3D View window header. See section 5.10.1 for information on changing these labels. New views are created by clicking the Create button in the New Views area of the form. The Settings… button displays the Graphics Settings form whose functionality is described later in this chapter. Selecting one or more entries in the grid activates the Background… and Delete buttons. Clicking the Background… button displays the Background Colour form from which a new background colour may be selected. The setting affects all 3D Views highlighted in the grid. Clicking the Delete button deletes all 3D Views highlighted in the grid. No warning or confirmation alerts are given.
L
3D Views may also be delete by clicking the Delete button on the top right of the 3D View Window.
Right clicking in the grid displays a pop-up menu that contains the following options: • Select All – this option selects all the 3D Views in the grid list. • Background colour… - this option displays the Background colour form, as described earlier. • Delete – this option deletes all 3D Views highlighted in the grid list. All multiple views created in this way use the global Drawlist; therefore, any changes to the Drawlist contents or display settings will affect the content of all of the views. Each 3D View has a full set of view control buttons that apply only to that view. Each view also has its own prompt area and Status bar.
www.aveva.com 72
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The default 3D View and any newly created view initially fills the complete 3D View area so that the window frame cannot be seen. Left clicking the Restore button on the graphics window reduces the size of all of the 3D Views so that the window frames are displayed. The views may then be re-sized and positioned using standard Windows manipulation functionality. The 3D View windows may also be organised using standard Windows tiling and selection functionality. Only one 3D View may be ‘active’ at any one time. The checkmark denotes the current view. A view may be made active by clicking anywhere in the view with the left mouse button. If the view window frames are displayed the active window is highlighted. The colours and style depend on the Windows display settings. A 3D View window may be re-sized to completely fill the 3D View area by left clicking the Maximise button 2D View Window
5.4.2
Local Views Selecting the New Local View of Selection option from the Drawlist Options pop-up menu creates a Local View of the current graphical selection. This may be done from any 3D View. A local view is like any other additional 3D View except that it has its own Drawlist, containing only those elements that are in the local view.
www.aveva.com 73
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
It is, therefore, possible to have a number of Drawlists apart from the global Drawlist. Only one Drawlist may be displayed at one time. If a Drawlist for a 3D View is displayed and another view is made active and the Drawlist for that view opened, it will replace the previously displayed Drawlist.
5.4.3
Clone Views Selecting the New Clone View option from the Drawlist Options pop-up menu creates a Clone View of the current 3D View. This may be done from any 3D View. A Clone View uses the same Drawlist as the 3D View it was cloned from. This may be the global Drawlist or a local Drawlist, depending on how the original view was created.
5.5
View Projection Mode
Objects in a 3D View may be viewed in a parallel projection or in perspective.
www.aveva.com 74
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The view projection mode may be set by selecting View>Settings>Perspective from the main menu. If the Perspective option is unchecked the projection mode is set to Parallel. If the Perspective option is checked the projection mode is set to Perspective. Function keys F1 through F9 have specific uses in PDMS. The projection mode may also be toggled by pressing the F4 function key. The specific uses of the other function keys are described elsewhere in this chapter. The current view projection mode is displayed in the Status bar.
L
The majority of operations are normally carried out in parallel projection mode with perspective being reserved for creating realistic screen shots. However, all PDMS functionality will work in perspective mode.
www.aveva.com 75
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.6
Zoom, Pan, Rotate and Walk
A 3D View may be interactively manipulated by zooming, panning, rotating and walking to achieve the desired view of the displayed items. Each of these modes is used by dragging the middle mouse button or using the scroll wheel.
5.6.1
Setting the Middle Mouse Button Options
The middle mouse button options may be set in a number of ways, as described in the following sections and may be accessed in the following ways: • Using the View menu Selecting View>Middle Button Drag from the main menu displays a sub-menu where the middle mouse button drag mode may be set. The checkmark denotes the current mode.
L The Walk option is greyed out as it is only available when the 3D View is in Perspective Mode. • Using the 3D View pop-up menu Right clicking in a blank area of a 3D View displays the 3D View popup menu. The Middle Button Drag option displays a sub-menu from where the middle mouse button drag mode may be set. The checkmark denotes the current mode. • Using the View Control buttons Left clicking the following View Control buttons on the left side of a 3D View perform sets the middle mouse button drag modes: Sets Zoom Rectangle mode Sets Zoom In/Out mode Sets Rotate mode Sets Pan mode Sets Walk mode • Using the Function Keys The function keys that affect the middle mouse button drag mode are:
L
F2 – sets Zoom mode F3 – sets Pan mode F5 – sets Rotate mode F6 – sets Walk mode Zoom Rectangle mode is not available using the Function Keys.
www.aveva.com 76
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The current setting of the middle mouse button drag mode is displayed on the Status bar:
5.6.2
Zoom
Zooming in a 3D View may be performed in the following ways: • Zoom Rectangle – with the middle mouse button drag mode set to Zoom Rectangle, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button in the 3D View and moving the mouse to drag a rectangle will zoom to the extents of the rectangle when the button is released. The rectangle may be started from any corner. • Zoom In/Out – with the middle mouse button drag mode set to Zoom In/Out, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button anywhere in the 3D View and moving the cursor up the screen will zoom in and moving the cursor down the screen will zoom out. • Using the Scroll Wheel Scrolling the wheel forward will zoom in and scrolling the wheel backwards zooms out. Zooming with the scroll wheel can be performed in any of the middle mouse button drag modes; however, it is much ‘coarser’ than zooming with the middle mouse button drag.
5.6.3
Pan
Panning enables the contents of the 3D View to be moved across the view in any direction. With the middle mouse button mode set to Pan, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button anywhere in the 3D View and moving the cursor in any direction will pan the view. The view will pan in the opposite direction to the mouse movement and in direct correlation to the amount the cursor is moved. The 3D View may also be effectively panned by Setting the Centre of Interest. Positioning the cursor anywhere in the 3D view and clicking the middle mouse button will move the selected point to the centre of the view, thus effectively panning the view. Thus, the view may be panned in any direction by selectively picking a point in the view and clicking the middle mouse button. The view will pan by the distance between the picked point and the centre of the view. Keeping the cursor in the same location and repeatedly clicking the middle mouse button will keep panning the view.
5.6.4
Rotate
The contents of the 3D View may be rotated around a vertical or horizontal axis running through the centre of the view. The view may only be rotated around one axis at a time. The rotation may be achieved in two ways: • Using the middle mouse button - with the middle mouse button mode set to Rotate, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button anywhere in the 3D View and moving the mouse left or right across the view will rotate the view contents around the vertical axis. Moving the mouse up or down the view will rotate the view contents around the horizontal axis.
www.aveva.com 77
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Using the 3D View Borders – selecting View>Settings>Borders from the main menu toggles the display of rotation sliders at the bottom and right hand side of the 3D View. The rotation sliders may also be toggled by pressing the F9 function key. The sliders are operated by dragging the orientation indicator with left mouse button. Dragging the bottom slider will rotate the contents of the 3D View around the vertical axis and dragging the right hand slider will rotate the contents of the 3D View around the horizontal axis.
5.6.4.1 Rotation Modes Using the concept of an eye and a target, PDMS has two modes for rotating in a 3D View: • Model Mode – this mode rotates the eye around the target. In actuality it appears as though the model is rotating; however, it is the eye moving around the target. • Eye Mode – this mode rotates the target around the eye. This has a very different effect to that of model mode and the model can quickly disappear from the 3D View. The rotation mode may be set by selecting View>Settings>Eye from the main menu. If the Eye option is unchecked the rotation mode is set to Model. If the Eye option is checked the rotation mode is set to Eye. The rotation mode may also be toggled by pressing the F7 function key. The current rotation mode is displayed in the Status bar.
5.6.5
Walk
Walkthrough mode enables the eye point move towards or away from the model, and is only available if the3D View is in Perspective viewing mode. With the middle mouse button drag mode set to Walk, clicking and holding down the middle mouse button anywhere in the 3D View and moving the mouse up the screen walks the eye point forward, i.e. towards the model, and moving the mouse down the screen walks the eye point backwards, i.e. away from the model.
5.6.6
Controlling the speed of middle mouse button operations
The speed of manipulating the model with the middle mouse button drag options will largely depend on the amount of data being displayed and the speed of the hardware, particularly the graphics card, being used. However, the speed of zooming, panning, rotating and walking can be affected in the following ways: • Holding the Ctrl key down while dragging will increase the speed of the operation • Holding down the Shift key while dragging will decrease the speed of the operation
L
The speed of the Zoom Rectangle function is not affected by the Ctrl or Shift keys. The speed indication is displayed in the Status bar.
www.aveva.com 78
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.7
Setting the View Centre
Selecting any of the Walk To and Zoom To options, either from the View menu or 3D View pop-up menu, or clicking the Walk To Draw List and Zoom to Selection buttons in the 3D View will set the centre of the view to the relevant selection.
The view centre may also be set on a selection, an identified element or a screen pick. Selecting View > Set Centre of View from the main menu or the Set Centre Of View option from the 3D View pop-up menu displays identical sub-menus, whose options are: • Selection – this option centres the view on current Graphical Selection, if on exists, or the CE if not. • Identify Element… - this option centres the view on an identified element. The element is identified by left clicking on it in the 3D View.
L Selecting an element in this way does not make it the CE. • Screen Pick… - this option allows a position to be identified in a 3D View to become the centre of view. The position is picked by left clicking anywhere in the view. Clicking in the 3D View with the middle mouse button also performs this operation. , on the left side Left clicking on the Centre on Selection button of a 3D view, sets the view centre to the current Graphical Selection, if one exists, or the CE if not.
5.8
Clipping Clipping enables only those parts of the model which fall inside a clipping box or defied clipping lanes to be displayed. Right clicking on the Clipping & Options button on the left side of a 3D View displays the Clipping Options pop-up menu that contains the following options: • Enable – this option controls whether the whole model or the clipped model is displayed in a 3D View. Selecting this option toggles clipping on and off, checking and un-checking the option on the menu. Left clicking the Clipping & Options button also toggles clipping on and off. The default setting for clipping is off.
• Capped – when clipping is used, only parts of the model inside the clipping box or planes are displayed. Where items are intersected by the clipping box or plane, this option enables a coloured cap to be added to show that the items extend beyond the displayed region. Selecting this option toggles capping on and off, checking and un-checking the option on the menu. The default setting for capping is off.
www.aveva.com 79
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Colour… - this option sets the cap colour. The Clip Cap Colour form is displayed from which the cap colour may be selected.
• CE – this option sets the limits of the clipbox to the extents of the CE. The Clip CE button View performs the same function.
on the 3D
• Owner – this option sets the limits of the clipbox to the extents of the owner of the CE. • Limits Box – this option sets the clipbox limits to the dimensions of the explicitly defined Limits Box, if one exists. Refer to section 4.2.1 for information on explicitly defining a Limits Box. • Pick Limits – this option sets the extent of the clipping box to be defined by picking two opposing corners of a box. The corner positions are defined by graphically picking on the 3D View. Positioning options are controlled by the Positioning Control Toolbar. Refer to section 6.2.1 for details of the Positioning Control Toolbar. • Explicit…- selecting this option displays the Clipping Box form and activates the Positioning Control Toolbar. If a clipbox has previously been defined its dimensions and origin are shown on the form, if not, a default sized box is placed at the origin of the view.
The size of the clipbox may be specified by entering values in the appropriate text boxes. The position, i.e. the centre, of the clipbox may be specified by entering co-ordinates in the relevant text boxes or by graphically picking in the 3D View. Picking options are controlled by the Positioning Control Toolbar. The orientation of the clipbox may be specified by defining a plane through which it passes using the two buttons at the top of the Orientation section of the form or by editing the Y is and Z is text boxes. The extents of the clipbox may be modified by entering a +ve or –ve value in the Extend clipped volume by text box. Clicking the Apply button enables the defined clip box. • Planes…as an alternative to the clipbox, up to six individual planes may be defined to clip the model. The clipping planes feature and the clipbox are mutually exclusive, i.e. enabling one has the effect of disabling the other and clearing any related forms and aid graphics. Clipping planes may be at any angle, the direction of the plane considered to point into the area of interest.
www.aveva.com 80
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Selecting this option displays the Clipping Planes form The Define clipping plane pull-down is used to select the plane (16) to be defined. Clicking the Pick button enables a clipping plane to be aligned with an item when picked in the 3D View. The Position and Direction fields are automatically filled in based on the position and orientation of the picked item. Once the position and direction of the plane are defined it can be enabled by clicking the Enable plane button. When selected the button is greyed out and the Disable plane button becomes active. Thus the plane can be enabled or disabled. If any manual modifications are made to the Position or Direction settings the Enable and Disable plane buttons are temporarily replaced by the Apply changes and Discard changes buttons. Once one of these buttons is selected the display reverts back to the Enable and Disable plane buttons.
When a plane is defined a labelled graphics aid arrow is displayed at the origin of the plane. The aid arrow is normal to the plane and points in the plane direction. The Reverse button will reverse the direction of the plane and update the displayed aid arrow and Direction text box. The location of the plane can be finely adjusted using the gadgets in the Slide plane out or in area of the form. The left and right arrow keys move the plane by increments of 50mm. An explicit value may be entered in the text box. A +ve value will move the plane in the direction of the aid arrow, i.e. in, and a –ve value will move the plane in the opposite direction of the aid arrow, i.e. out. Dragging the slider with the left mouse button moves the plane in the indicated direction, i.e. In or Out, by the value displayed in the text box. The Tools form menu has the following options: • Derive 6 planes from grid lines… - this option displays the Clip from Grid form that enables the clip plane to be derived grid lines. See section 7.5 for information on grid lines. • Derive 6 planes from clip box… - this option uses the clipbox to define the six planes, e.g. following Clip CE and the manually adjusted. • Clear all clip planes… - this option displays a confirmation alert form for removal of all clip plane data.
www.aveva.com 81
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
5.9
More View Menu Options
The View menu contains the following options in addition to those described earlier: • Print Graphics…- this option displays the standard Windows print dialogue and prints the contents of the current 3D View.
• Copy Image – this option displays a sub-menu with options for the resolution of the copied image. The contents of the current 3D View are copied as an image to the clipboard at the requested resolution and may be pasted into any document.
• Save View – this option displays a sub-menu that enables up to four views to be saved for each 3D View. Selecting a view number saves the view for the current 3D and activates the corresponding Restore View button on the left side of the 3D View. Selecting a view number that already has a saved view overwrites the existing view with no confirmation alert. • Restore View – this option displays a sub-menu from which a saved view may be restored on the current 3D View. Views may also be restored by selecting the appropriate Restore View button on the left side of the 3D View. Only saved view numbers are active on the sub-menu and restore buttons. • Settings – this option displays a sub-menu that has the following options that have not been described previously: Shaded – this option toggles between a solid colour shaded and a wire-line view representation. Most operations in PDMS use a solid colour shaded view but occasionally it may be beneficial to work in wire-line mode. The shaded mode may also be toggled using the F8 function key.
Black/White Background – these options set the background colour of the current 3D View to black or white.
High Quality – this option can be used to toggle between ‘high’ and ‘standard’ quality images of the Design model. A ‘high’ quality image is slower to draw and manipulate than a ‘standard quality one.
Show Tooltips – this option toggles the display of Tooltips for database elements. If enabled, the name of the element under the cursor in the 3D View is displayed in the tooltip.
www.aveva.com 82
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Animations - toggles smooth pan and zoom operations in the 3D view when the Zoom To or Walk To options are used. The pan or zoom operation is animated to show the transition from the original view definition to the final view definition. Animation only operates if the system determines that the hardware is capable of performing a smooth pan or zoom with the size of the model displayed in the 3D View.
5.10 Graphics Settings Selecting Settings>Graphics… from the main menu displays the Graphics Settings form. The form contains five tabs from which the majority of graphics settings can be made, including many that have been described earlier. Each tab is described in the following sections.
5.10.1 Graphics Settings – 3D Views Tab The 3D Views tab enables settings to be made that affect the 3D View. All of these settings, with the exception of the View Title, have alternative ways of being set that have been previously discussed in this training guide. Each set of changes made on the form will not take effect until the Apply button is clicked. The Title text box contains the default 3D View title that is displayed on the view header. This default title may be changed by entering a new title in the text box. Each 3D View will still be identified a sequential number but it will be pre-fixed by the Title text.
5.10.2 Graphics Settings - Colour Tab The General Colours area of the tab enables colours used for specific purposes in a 3D View to be set. Clicking the colour button adjacent to the purpose label displays a colour form with buttons for the 50 standard PDMS colours. Selecting a colour button changes the button colour on the tab accordingly. Each colour form has a title describing the purpose it is setting:
• CE – this button sets the colour of the current element in a 3D View. This colour overrides any other colour that may be set for the element.
www.aveva.com 83
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Active – this button sets the colour of elements associated with the CE, e.g. if an equipment primitive is the CE then all other primitives owned by that equipment will be displayed in the active colour. • Visible – this button sets the colour of all other elements in the 3D View other than the CE and those elements with the active colour. This setting is only applied if Auto Colour rules are inactive. • Aids – this button sets the colour of the graphical aids used in PDMS. • Highlight – this button sets the highlight feedback colour, e.g. for highlighting elements to be deleted. Auto Colours are a set of rules that define the colours for different elements in a 3D View, e.g. pipe systems may be displayed in different colours according to the fluid code or equipment in different areas shown in different colours. Auto Colours are toggled on and off using the Auto Colour checkbox on the tab. The Dynamic Auto Colour checkbox controls the re-evaluation of an elements colour if the attribute that the colour is dependant on is modified. If enabled the colour will be changed dynamically if the attribute is changed and if disabled the colour will change when the element is next added to a Drawlist. Both of these settings are checked by default. The Auto Colour Rules… button displays the Auto Colour Rules form, from which Auto Colour rules may be created, deleted and modified.
5.10.3 Graphics Settings – Representation Tab How items are represented in a 3D View is controlled from this tab. The Level area of the form shows the current display level for various item types in the model. The display level may be set by entering a valid display level number in the appropriate text box.
L
The PDMS default display level is 6. The Tube and Centreline checkboxes are used for pipe components. In the piping catalogue, two representations for components are defined, detailed solid representation and a centreline representation. The checkboxes toggle the representation of the components in the 3D View.
The Holes Drawn checkbox controls how negative elements are displayed in the 3D Views. PDMS does not fundamentally change the solid primitives from which items are created but modifies them with negative primitives that ‘cut’ the solid primitives.
www.aveva.com 84
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The display of the negative primitives is controlled by the Holes Drawn checkbox. If disabled, any negative elements are displayed as black lines in a shaded view. If enabled, the negative primitives ‘cut’ the primitives to show the ‘holes’.
The Insulation pull-down controls the display of insulation on Pipework, if any, as defined in the catalogue. The default setting is Off. Selecting Solid will display the insulation as a solid colour, however, a degree of translucency may be applied to the insulation, i.e. the pipe will be seen through the insulation, by selecting an appropriate percentage value from the options list. The Obstruction pull-down controls the display of obstruction volumes. The default setting is Off. Selecting Solid will display any obstruction volume as a solid element; however, a degree of translucency may be applied to the obstruction volume by selecting an appropriate percentage value from the options list. The Arc Tolerance value controls the representation of certain curves as polygon segments or faceting planes. The smaller the arc tolerance, the smoother the curve drawn, however, on very large models this may be an overhead on graphical performance.
The arc tolerance value may be set by entering a number in the text box. The default setting is 10 (mm) and the minimum setting is 0.1 (mm).
5.10.4 Graphics Settings – Steelwork Tab
www.aveva.com 85
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Steelwork tab controls the display of structural profiles and the display, size and colour Primary and Secondary Modes for structural sections. The Display checkboxes toggle the display of the Nodes, the Size textboxes enable the size of the Nodes to be set and the Colour buttons enable the colour of the displayed Nodes to be set. Primary and Secondary Nodes are explained in TM1101 Structural Modelling (Basic) Training Guide.
5.10.5 Graphics Settings – Plines and Ppoints Tab The Plines & Ppoints tab controls the display of Plines (on structural profiles) and Ppoints (on primitives and piping, HVAC and cable tray components). The Display checkboxes toggle the display of the Plines and Ppoints and the Pkey and Numbers checkboxes control the display of the Pline name or Ppoint number respectively. The Length value determines the length of the displayed Plines or Ppoints. Plines are detailed inTM-1101 Structural Modelling (Basic) Training Guide. Refer to Chapter 9, Basic Equipment Modelling, for details of Ppoints on primitives. The Graphics Settings form has a row of buttons along the bottom of the form that are applicable to all tabs. The buttons have the following functions: The Load button loads Graphics Settings from a previously saved file. The Save button saves the current Graphics Settings to a file. The OK button applies the form settings and dismisses the form. The Cancel button cancels any changes made and dismisses the form The Apply button applies the form settings.
www.aveva.com 86
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 3 Multiple, Local and Clone Views • Select Design>General from the main menu to select the General application.
L
All of the features described work in any Design application.
• Select Display>Graphical View from the main menu to create a new 3D View.. Note that the end of the main Window header bar now reads [3D View (2)], indicating that there are now two 3D Views. Select Window>Tile Vertically from the main menu to show both 3D Views. • Select Display>View Control… from the main menu to display the 3D View Control form. Note the two entries in the form list. Click the Settings… button on the form to display the Graphics Settings form. • Make sure the 3D View tab is current on the form and click the Background Colour button (the solid black button) to display the Background Colour form. Select any colour by left clicking on it and then click the Dismiss button on the form. Select the Apply button on the Graphics Settings form and then the OK button to dismiss the form. • Click the Create button on the 3D View Control form to create a third 3D View. Note that the view has the selected background colour and fills the 3D View space. Select Window>Tile Vertically from the main menu to display all three 3D Views. Select the Drawlist… option from the Drawlist Options popup menu in 3D View(2) and note that the Drawlist form title bar changes to reflect the active view. Repeat for 3D View(3). All three views have the same Drawlist content as they all use the Global Drawlist. • Click 3D View(3) entry in the 3D View Control form list and click the Delete button. Repeat this for 3D View(2) and then click the maximise button in the top right corner of 3D View(1). Close the 3D View Control form. • Left click on TANK1 in the 3D View to make it the CE and the Graphical Selection, i.e. its primitives are bounded by a green line. Select the New Local View of Selection option from the Drawlist Options pop-up menu to create 3D View(2) that contains only TANK1. Click the minimise button in the top right corner of 3D View(2) to reveal 3D View(1) and then maximise the view. • Left click on TANK2 in the 3D View to make it the CE and the Graphical Selection. Hold down the Ctrl key and left click on the pipe coming out of the bottom of TANK2 to add it to the Graphical Selection. Note that the pipe is only highlighted up to the first elbow. Continue holding down the Ctrl key and click pipe just past the elbow to add it to the Graphical Selection. Keep adding the pipe components up to the flange just before the tee to the pump, as shown:
www.aveva.com 87
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Select the New Local View of Selection option from the Drawlist Options pop-up menu to create 3D View(3) that contains TANK2, pipe1-b2 and pipe2-b1. • Select the New Clone View option from the Drawlist Options pop-up menu to create 3D View(4) that is a clone of 3D View(3). • Select Window>Tile Vertically from the main menu to display all four view. The layout should look something like this:
Manipulating 3D Views • Delete 3D Views 2, 3 and 4 and maximise 3D View(1). Remove the CIVILS.ZONE from the Drawlist and set the view direction to Iso3. • Select View>Middle Button Drag>Zoom Rectangle from the main menu. Drag a rectangle around TANK1 in the 3D View by clicking and holding the middle mouse button to the bottom left of the element and, keeping the middle mouse button held down, moving the pointer to the top right of the element. A rectangle will be ‘rubber banded’ from the first point. Release the middle mouse button and the display will zoom to the rectangle limits. on the left side of the 3D View. Click and hold • Click the Middle mouse button: Zoom In/Out button down the middle mouse button and move the pointer down the screen to zoom out. Move the pointer up the screen to zoom in. Rotate the scroll wheel in each direction and note that this has the same zoom effect, although the scroll wheel zoom is ‘coarser’. • Right click in a blank area of the 3D View to display the pop-up menu and select the Middle Button Drag>Pan option. Note the change from Zoom to Pan in the Status area at the bottom left of the 3D
www.aveva.com 88
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
View. Click and hold down the middle mouse button and move the pointer around the screen, noting the panning effect on the model. • Click the middle mouse button with the pointer away from the centre of the 3D View to set the centre of interest, noting the panning effect of this action. Click the middle mouse button several times with the pointer in the same place to pan the view in the same direction. Click the Walk to Draw List button to recentre the displayed elements. • Click the Middle mouse button: Rotate button on the left side of the 3D View, click and hold down the middle mouse button and move the pointer left and right across the screen to rotate the displayed elements around a vertical axis in the centre of the view. Release the middle mouse button and repeat the action but this time move the pointer up and down the screen to rotate the displayed elements around a horizontal axis. • Press the F7 function key to set Eye in the Status area and repeat the rotate actions noting the difference from the Model setting. Press the F7 function key again to return to the Model setting. • Press the F9 function key to display the rotation sliders on the bottom and right-hand side of the 3D View. Click and hold the left mouse button on the bottom slider and move the slider left and right to rotate the displayed elements around a vertical axis. Repeat the action with the right-hand slider, moving the pointer up and down to rotate the displayed elements around a horizontal axis. Press the F9 function key again to remove the sliders. • Press the F4 function key to set the view projection mode to Perspective, noting the change in the Status area. Select View>Middle Button Drag>Walk from the main menu to set Walk mode. Click and hold down the middle mouse button and move the pointer up the screen to walk the eye point forward. Move the pointer down the screen to walk the eye point backwards. Press the F4 function key to set the view projection mode to Parallel. • Click the Walk to Draw List button and set the view direction to Iso 3. Click on TANK2 in the 3D View to make it the Graphical Selection and select View>Set Centre of View>Selection from the main menu. Note that the view adjusts to move the equipment item at the centre of the view. Press the F5 function key to set Rotate mode and rotate the displayed elements, noting that the centre of rotation is TANK2. Left click anywhere in a blank area of the 3D View to remove the Graphical Selection. on the Utilities Toolbar to activate it. Select Set Centre of • Click the Navigate to Element button View>Identify Element… from the 3D View pop-up menu and select any primitive on the PUMP1 equipment item. Rotate the model and note the rotation centre. • Select Set Centre of View>Screen Pick… from the 3D View pop-up menu and left click anywhere in the 3D View. Note that the pointer location when you clicked has moved to the centre of the view. Rotate the displayed elements. Clipping • Click the Walk to Draw List button and set the view direction to Iso3. Make PUMP1 the CE and right click on the Limits CE & Options button on the left side of the 3D View and select the Explicit… option from the pop-up menu to display the Volume form. Select the Select>CE option from the form menu, click the Apply button and then the Dismiss button. This has set the Limits Box to PUMP1. Zoom out the 3D View. on the left side of the 3D View and select the Limits Box • Right click the Clipping & Options button option from the pop-up menu. Note that PUMP1 is the only element displayed as all others have been clipped. • Right click the Clipping & Options button again, noting that the Enable option on the pop-up menu is checked, i.e. active. Select the Enable option to ‘un-clip’ the 3D View and note the effect on the displayed elements.
www.aveva.com 89
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Click the Walk to Draw List button and right click the Clipping & Options button again and select the Explicit… option from the pop-up menu to display the Clip form. Enter the following values in the form: Xlength Ylength Zlength
1778 1556 3550
East North Up
2711 7000 3350
Click the Apply button on the Clip form and note that the 3D View has been clipped to TANK2 and some small part of its support steelwork. Click the Dismiss button on the form. • Right click the Clipping & Options button again and select the Planes…option from the pop-up menu to display the planes Clip form. Select Tools>Derive 6 planes from clipbox… from the form menu. Six independent clipping plans have now been derived. Clip Plane 1 is shown by default in the 3D View and its Position and Direction information is displayed on the form. • Press the F8 function key to display the elements in wireline mode and note the displayed aid vector arrow which is normal to the clip plane. On the planes Clip form; open the Define clipping plane options list and select 6 from the list. Note that the aid vector arrow is now shown for Clip Plane 6. Press the F8 function button again toggle back to shaded mode. • Right click the Clipping & Options button again and select the Colour… option from the pop-up menu to display the Clip Cap Colour form. Select Green from the form palette and click the Dismiss button on the form. Right click the Clipping & Options button again and select the Capped option from the pop-up menu to activate capping. • On the planes Clip form, with Clip Plane 6 as the current clipping plane, in the Slide plane out or in area of the form, enter 500 in the Slide by text box and press the Return key., noting that Clip Plane 6 has slid inwards by 500mm and capped the clipped cylinder in green. • Select 3 from the Define clipping plane options list and use the left and right arrow buttons each side Nudge out or in label to adjust Clip Plane 3. • Select 1 from the Define clipping plane options list and enter E 45 N in the Direction textbox, press the Return key and click the Apply changes button. Note that Clip Plane 1 has changed direction and affected the clipping. Left click and hold on the Out/In slider and move it to adjust Clip Plane 1. • Click the Close button on the planes Clip form. Right click the Clipping & Options button again and select the Enable option from the pop-up menu to disable clipping. Saving and Restoring Views • Click the Walk to Draw List button and set the view direction to Iso3. Select View>Save View> View 1 from the main menu. on the left side of the 3D View noting that it is • Move the pointer over the first Restore View button now active, compared with the remaining three buttons. • Modify the view by zooming, panning and rotating. Select Save View>View 3 from the 3D View pop-up menu. Modify the view again by zooming panning and rotating. • Select Restore View>View 1 from the 3D View pop-up menu, noting that the first saved view has been restored.
www.aveva.com 90
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Select the Restore View 3 button has been restored.
from the left side of the 3D View, noting that the second saved view
• Save other views and use the Restore View buttons to toggle between them. Graphics Settings • Click the Walk to Draw List button and set the view direction to Iso3. Select Settings>Graphics… from the main menu to display the Graphics Settings form. to toggle it on. • Click on the Colour tab to make it current and click the Navigate to Element button Zoom in to PUMP1 and left click on the cylinder that forms part of the pump motor. Note that the cylinder is now coloured yellow, the default CE colour, as shown in the Colour tab, but the rest of the primitives that make up the equipment are coloured orangered, the default Active colour, as shown on the Colour tab. • Click the CE colour button on the Graphics Settings form to display the Current Element Colour form. Click on the brightred button, in the top right corner, to set the colour and click the Dismiss button on the Current Element Colour form. Click the Apply button on the Graphics Settings form and note that the cylinder is now coloured brightred. • Click the Auto Colour checkbox on the Graphics Settings form to uncheck it, i.e. toggle the setting off, and note that the Dynamic Auto Colour checkbox is greyed out. Click the Visible colour button to display the Visible Element Colour form and select any colour. Click the Dismiss button on the form and then click the Apply button on the Graphics Settings form. To make this change to the displayed elements they must be removed from the Drawlist and added back to it. Right click on the TRA.SITE in Design Explorer and select 3D View>Remove from the pop-up menu. Add back the PIPE.ZONE, EQUIP.ZONE and STRUC.ZONE separately to the Drawlist and note that all elements are displayed in the new Visible colour. • Click the Auto Colour checkbox on the Graphics Settings form to check it, i.e. toggle the setting on. Remove all elements from the Drawlist and add back the PIPE.ZONE, EQUIP.ZONE and STRUC.ZONE and note that they all now use the Auto Colour Rules, i.e. each type of element, equipment, pipes and structural components, are different colours. • Click on the Representation tab to make it current. Click the Tube checkbox to uncheck it and click the Centreline checkbox to check it. Click the Apply button and note the change in representation of the piping elements, i.e. the only the pipe centrelines are drawn and valves have a ‘schematic’ representation. Changes the settings back and click the Apply button again to change the representation. • Zoom in to the top of one of the TANK2 support columns where the horizontal beams connect. Note the black lines and circles that represent negative extrusion that cut-back the steel beams and make holes in the columns for bolted joints. Click the Holes drawn checkbox to check it and click the Apply button. Note that the black lines and circles representing the negatives have disappeared and that the negatives have ‘cut’ the steelwork. • Zoom in further to the holes in the top of the column and note that the holes are ‘faceted’. Enter 1 in the Arc Tolerance textbox and click the Apply button. Note that the holes in the column are now more ‘round’ in appearance. • Zoom out from the column and zoom in on one of the valves in the model. Open the Obstruction options list, select the 50% option and click the Apply button. Note that semi-translucent shapes have appeared around parts of the valve. These represent the obstruction volumes for, say, hand wheel access, valve stem rise, etc. and are used for clash detection. Select the Off option from the Obstruction options list and click the Apply button to remove the obstruction volumes from the display.
www.aveva.com 91
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 92
CHAPTER 6
6
Attributes, Positioning and Orientation
6.1
Element Attributes
Every PDMS element has a fixed set of properties know as its attributes. Some attributes are common throughout the range of elements, some are applicable to many elements and some are unique to one type of element. For some element attributes, appropriate values are set by the creation or modification of the element whilst others may be set or entered by the user via the User Interface. For example, a cylinder primitive (CYLI) has the following attributes:
Attribute
Description
Name
The explicit element name or system generated element name.
RefNo
The unique database reference number.
Type Lock Owner Position Orientation
Level
Obstruction Diameter
The type of element. May be displayed as the abbreviated name. May be set to True (locked) or False (unlocked). If locked, the element may not be modified or deleted. The name of the elements owning element. The position of the elements origin with respect to its owner’s origin. All primitives have an origin. The values of the coordinates are expressed in the current session units. See Appendix A for details of PDMS Primitives. The orientation of the components axis system with respect to its owner’s axis system. See section 2.8 for an explanation of axis systems. PDMS can produce different representations of an item, depending on how it has been modelled and the representation levels used. The Level attribute is expressed as a range of levels; however, only one display level (for certain element types) may be displayed at one time. The Obstruction attribute is used to declare whether an element may be considered solid or not. Obstruction values may be set to 2 (Hard), 1 (Soft) or 0 (No obstruction). This attribute is used in clash detection purposes. The diameter of the cylinder in the current session units.
www.aveva.com 93
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Height Tmrref RepCount
The height of the cylinder in the current session units. Template repeat reference. This is an advanced attribute applicable to primitives used with a repeat function in templates. Repeat Count. This is an advanced attribute applicable to primitives used with a repeat function in templates.
L
Note that only the Diameter and Height attributes describe the geometry of the cylinder. Other primitives will have specific attributes that describe their geometry. For a comprehensive list of element attributes, see the Data Model Reference Manual supplied with PDMS.
6.1.1
Pseudo Attributes
In addition to the fixed set of attributes that all PDMS elements have, they also have a set of ‘derived’ attributes known as Pseudo Attributes. The number of pseudo attributes varies depending on the element type. Pseudo attributes may be queried and used in expressions, say in reports, in the same way as fixed attributes. Examples of pseudo attributes are: Brweight – Branch weight (in kg) Clle – centreline length (of branch) Gcof – Gross centre of gravity (position) Ncof – Nett centre of gravity (position) Gwei - Gross weight (in kg) Nwei – Nett weight (in kg) Cutl – cut length (of structural profile) Tctl – true cut length (of structural profile) For a comprehensive list of pseudo attributes, see the Data Model Reference Manual supplied with PDMS.
6.1.2
User Defined Attributes
In addition to the standard element attributes, PDMS enables additional User Defined Attributes (UDA) to be assigned to one or more elements. The Lexicon module is used to create, modify and assign a UDA which is normally done by the System or Project Administrator. A UDA is just like any other attribute but may be specific to the company or the particular project. The setting of the UDA is normally done manually by the user, although it may have a default value. UDAs are prefixed by a colon which differentiates them from standard attributes, e.g.: •
:Manufacturer - User Defined Attribute
•
Height - Standard Attribute
www.aveva.com 94
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
6.1.3
Querying and Displaying Attributes
When working with PDMS there are numerous occasions when one or more attributes of a database element are required to be known, whether it be a standard attribute, a pseudo attribute or a UDA. PDMS provides two ways to query an element’s attributes.
6.1.3.1 The Attributes Form Selecting Query>Attributes… from the main menu, or selecting the Show Attributes option from the Design Explorer pop-up menu, displays the Attributes form for the CE. The Attributes from is a re-sizeable and dockable form that displays, by default, the standard attribute data and any UDAs for the current element in a tabular grid. The Track current element checkbox toggles the updating of the form when a new CE is selected.
Clicking in the grid with the right mouse button displays a pop-up menu with the following options:
• Attribute, Description and Data Type – these options toggle the display of the attribute name, attribute description and attribute data type as a column in the grid. A checkmark beside the option means that the option is displayed.
• Sort by Attribute – this option sorts the grid by attribute name in alpha-numeric order. Any UDAs are displayed first in the grid as they begin with a colon (:). See section 6.1.2 for details of User Defined Attributes. • Wrt World – this option toggles between giving data with respect to owner and world for position and orientation attributes. See sections 6.2 and 6.3 respectively for an explanation of position and orientation attributes. • P-Points – this option toggles the display of Ppoint data for elements that own Ppoints. See section 9.1.3 for an explanation of Ppoints. • Pseudo Atts – this option toggles the display of pseudo attributes. See section 6.1.1 for an explanation of Pseudo Attributes.
www.aveva.com 95
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
6.1.3.2 Querying Attributes using the Command Window Element attributes may be queried via the Command Window. Entering Q ATT on the active line and pressing the Return key. Any attribute may be queried individually by enter Q followed by the full attribute name or its abbreviation, usually the first four characters, e.g. Q PURP has the same meaning as Q PURPOSE. Attributes may also be grouped together, e.g. Q NAME PURP POS will display the attribute and its value on three separate lines. UDAs appear in an element’s attribute list with the standard attributes if the Q ATT syntax is used. A pseudo attribute may be queried by entering Q where is the attributes name. Entering Q PSATTS lists all of pseudo attributes for the current element.
6.1.4
Modifying Attributes Standard attributes and UDAs may be modified by selecting Modify>Attributes… from the main menu to display the Modify Attributes form. The content of the form depends on the selected element; however, all of the elements standard attributes and UDAs will be displayed. By default, the CE button at the top of the form is active. When the form is opened the attributes of the CE are displayed. If a different element becomes the CE then clicking the CE button displays the new CE attributes. Checking the Track checkbox disables the CE button but automatically displays the CE attributes when a new CE is selected. Un-checking the Track checkbox enables the CE button. The greyed out Write Access and Modify Allowed checkboxes indicate whether the user has write access to the CE and rights to modify its attributes.
The lower part of the form displays the setting of the current attribute highlighted in the list. The display changes depending on the attribute type. For example: Highlighting a text type attribute displays a textbox where valid text may be entered, if the attribute is editable.
L
On this form, the database reference number is displayed for un-named elements and not the system generated name, e.g. CYLI 1 of EQUIPMENT /TANK1, are not displayed. Where an element has been explicitly named, the explicit name is displayed. Highlighting a numeric type attribute displays a textbox where a valid value may be entered, if the attribute is editable.
www.aveva.com 96
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Highlighting a Boolean type attribute displays checkbox. If the checkbox is checked the attribute value is true, if unchecked, the attribute value is false. Having entered an appropriate and valid text, numeric value or checked/unchecked a textbox, clicking the Apply button modifies the current attribute to the new value. Non-editable attributes, generally those set by the system, e.g. Type and Owner, are displayed with their values greyed out, indicating that they are non-editable. The Apply button is also disabled. Where the attribute is a reference to another element a Navigate to Ref button is displayed. Clicking the Navigate to Ref button makes the referenced element the CE.
L
The Referenced by: textbox is not used in the Design module.
Attributes may also be modified using the Command Window, however, this is not recommended for inexperienced PDMS users.
6.2
Positioning
Many PDMS elements have a Position attribute, e.g. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, SUBE, STRU, PANE, Primitives, etc. Positions in PDMS are expressed in terms of 3D co-ordinates, i.e. X, Y and Z. As PDMS assigns cardinal directions to these three axes, i.e. X is East, Y is North and Z is Up, positions are often expressed in terms E, N, U rather than X,Y,Z. The Position attribute gives the elements position with respect to its owner, however, where the elements owner does not have a Position attribute, the position is given with respect to its owner’s owner. For example, a PANE is owned by a FRMW, however, a FRMW does not have a Position attribute; therefore, the PANE’s position is given with respect to the FRMW’s owner, a STRU, which does have a Position attribute. Positions may be queried with respect to any other element that has a Position attribute by entering Q POS WRT or in the Command Window. For example, Q POS WRT /E1301 will give the position with respect to the origin of element /E1301 or Q POS WRT SITE will give the position with respect to the elements owning Site. Frequently the position is required with respect to the World origin. Entering Q POS WRT /* will give this position. Forms that create or modify elements often enable the position to be expressed with respect to other elements although the Position attribute always gives the value with respect to its owner, no matter how it was derived. In other cases forms only allow positions to be expressed with respect to their owner or the World.
www.aveva.com 97
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
6.2.1
The Positioning Control Toolbar
In EDG mode positions may be picked using other elements in the graphics display. Whenever this is applicable the Positioning Control toolbar is activated. The Positioning Control toolbar enables the user to specify how cursor picks are interpreted as positions, using a combination of Pick Type and Pick Method.
L
It must be emphasised that the Positioning Control toolbar is only active when applications are in Event Driven Graphics (EDG) mode.
6.2.1.1 Pick Type The Pick Type pull-down offers the following options: •
Any – uses any appropriate pick type.
•
Element - picking is restricted to elements.
•
Aid - picking is restricted to 3D Aid Constructs, including User Grid Systems.
•
Pline - picking is restricted to structural Plines.
•
Ppoint - picking is restricted to Ppoints or panel vertices.
•
Screen - enables pick anywhere in the graphical view, which identifies two co-ordinates, the third coordinate being taken from the current Working Plane or normal to the view direction if there is no active Working Plane.
•
Graphics – enables edge, surface and corner picks on any graphical element displayed in the graphical view.
6.2.1.2 Pick Method The Positioning Control Method determines how the position will be derived from subsequent cursor picks. The Pick Method pull-down offers the following options:
•
Snap - Selects the snap point nearest to the cursor pick point. This means nearest start, end or other valid snap point on a SCTN.
www.aveva.com 98
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Distance -applies the offset value entered in the textbox adjacent to the Method pull-down. For example a +ve value of 500derives a point 500 mm from the nearest snap point, measured towards the cursor position, whereas, a –ve value of 500 derives a point 500 mm from the nearest snap point, measured away from the cursor position.
•
Mid-Point - derives the mid-point between two snap points along a linear item.
•
Fraction - subdivides the distance between two snap points into a specified number of parts, entered in the textbox adjacent to Method pull-down. The derived position is the fractional position closest to the cursor pick.
•
Proportion - derives the point whose proportional position between two snap points has been entered in the textbox adjacent to the Method pull-down. For example, a value of 0.25 gives a point 25% along the line joining the first snap point to the second snap point.
www.aveva.com 99
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Intersect – requires two picked lines (any directional items) or three planes and then derives their intersection point.
•
Cursor - places the derived point exactly where the cursor picks on the element.
6.2.2
Positioning Explicitly
Elements may be positioned explicitly, i.e. at the specified co-ordinates, using the various methods. The Positioning Control Toolbar has an Explicit Position button form:
that displays the Explicit Position
An explicit position may be defined by entering values in the appropriate text boxes. As the text boxes only allow E, N and U values, for a position requiring, say, a West ordinate, a negative value would need to be entered in the E textbox. The Design applications have an Explicit Position form, displayed by selecting Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu, via which the explicit position of an element may be defined. The explicit position is defined by entering the required co-ordinates in the East/West, North/South and Up/Down textboxes, using the option buttons to set the appropriate direction in each case. If required, the Lock checkboxes may be used to fix the current coordinate along any axis. The wrt (with respect to) textbox can be used to identify an element whose coordinate system is to be used for the Position data. The Datum pull-down allows identification of the specific point on the element to which the position is to apply. The options for this pulldown vary depending on the selected element type.
The Select form menu options change the focus of the form, i.e. if a new CE is selected in Design Explorer, selecting the CE or Owner option displays the position of the CE or its owner, respectively, on the form. The Pick and Pick Owner options prompts for an item to be picked and the selected item or its owner’s position, respectively, is displayed on the form.
L
Picking a position with the Positioning Control Toolbar in conjunction with the Explicit Position form open automatically populates the coordinate textboxes.
www.aveva.com 100
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
When the form is opened or a new element selected, a ‘bounding box’ is placed around the extremities of the element to be moved, whether it is displayed or not. On entering new coordinates the bounding box is moved to the new location as a preview of the changes to be made. An axis aid is also displayed at the Datum point showing the cardinal directions.
Clicking the Apply button on the form moves the element to the specified location. Clicking the Dismiss button removes the bounding box and dismisses the form. An explicit position may also be specified by using the AT syntax in the Command Window, e.g. AT E 5000 N 4500 U 2975 positions the element at specified coordinates.
6.2.3
Positioning Relatively
Elements may be positioned relatively, i.e. from their current position by a specified direction and distance, using different methods. The Design applications have a Position By form, displayed by selecting Position>Relatively (BY)… from the main menu, via which an element may be moved relatively from its current position.
The offsets from the current position are defined by entering the required distances in the East/West, North/South and Up/Down textboxes, using the option buttons to set the appropriate direction in each case. If required, the Lock checkboxes may be used to fix the current position along any axis. The default offsets 0, 0, 0 represent the current position of the element. The wrt (with respect to) textbox can be used to identify an element whose coordinate system is to be used for the Position data.
A different element may be selected for relative position by using the pull-down at the top of the form: The options list has the following choices: •
CE – this option uses the CE as the element to move
www.aveva.com 101
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Pick – this option allows an element to be selected from a graphical view.
•
List – this option uses the elements in the current list. All elements in the list are repositioned.
When the form is first opened, or a new selection made, an axes aid, showing the cardinal directions, is placed at the elements current position. When offsets are entered aid lines show the offsets, true distance and the new position.
Clicking the Apply button on the form moves the element(s) by the specified offsets. The aids are still displayed showing the new position id the Apply button was clicked again. Clicking the Dismiss button removes the aids and dismisses the form.
L
In addition to these methods of positioning elements, the Design applications have other functionality to move, drag and perform planar moves affect an elements position. Similarly, the Model Editor enables elements to be moved graphically.
Relative positioning may also be specified by using the BY syntax in the Command Window, e.g. BY E 1500 N 2200 U 945 moves the element by the specified offsets in the specified direction. Only one or two offsets and directions need to be specified, e.g. BY D 1250 or BY W 750 D 1000.
6.3
Orientation
Many PDMS elements have an Orientation attribute, e.g. SITE, ZONE, EQUI, SUBE, STRU, PANE, Primitives, etc. Orientation in PDMS is expressed in terms of axes direction, e.g. Y is N and Z is U, meaning that the elements Y axis is pointing North and the elements Z axis is pointing Up. Only two axes need to be stated as the third axis direction is know because it conforms to the right hand rule, i.e. in this case X is E. Axis directions do not have to follow Cardinal directions, they can include one or more angles and directions, e.g. Y is N 45 E, meaning that the Y direction is North 45º East or Y is N 45 E 30 U, meaning that the Y direction is North 45º East 30º Up are both valid directions. Any direction can be expressed in PDMS using this syntax. Elements that have a rotation attribute have, essentially, their own axis system which is known as the frame of reference. For example, the Z axis for a cylinder (CYLI) primitive is along the length of the cylinder. If the Z axis is Up with respect to its owner, the cylinder is orientated in an ‘upright’ position. Inwww.aveva.com order to place the 102
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
cylinder horizontally, say with its Z axis pointing in an East/West direction, the orientation of the cylinder would need to be expressed as Y is N and Z is E (and X is D)
As with positioning, orientation is given with respect to its owner and the same rules apply for owning elements that do not have an orientation attribute. Orientations may be queried with respect to any other element that has a frame of reference by entering Q ORI WRT or in the Command Window. For example, Q ORI WRT /E1301 will give the orientation with respect to the element /E1301’s frame of reference, or Q ORI WRT SITE will give the orientation with respect to the elements owning Site’s frame of reference. Frequently the orientation is required with respect to the World frame of reference. Entering Q ORI WRT /* will give this orientation.
6.3.1
Display Axes on CE
on the Utilities An axes aid can be placed on the CE by clicking the Display Axes on CE button Toolbar or selecting Query>Axes… from the main menu. Both options also display the Define Axes form: The axes are displayed at the origin of the CE and are labelled X, Y, Z, i.e. the local frame of reference. The Cardinal Directions checkbox toggles between the local frame of reference and the World’s Cardinal directions. The Label checkbox toggles the display of a label that shows the CE name. The Size textbox enables the size of the axes aid to be set. The default is 500mm. The Close form menu has two options that close the form. The Retain axes option leaves the axes aid displayed and the Remove axes option removes it from the display. The Select form menu options places the axes on the selected item, i.e. if a new CE is selected in Design Explorer, selecting the CE or Owner option displays the axes aid on the new CE or its owner, respectively. The Pick and Pick Owner options prompts for an item to be picked and the axes aid is displayed on the picked item or its owner’s respectively.
www.aveva.com 103
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
6.3.2
Setting Orientation using Axes
The Design applications have an Orientate form, displayed by selecting Orientate>Axes… from the main menu, via which an element may be re-orientated by modifying its axes directions. The form displays, by default, the current X and Y axes directions, the third axes being automatically derived. The top axis option list contains X and Y and the bottom axis option list contains Y and Z. It is, therefore possible to set the required axes using these option lists. If one option list is changed, the other option list and the displayed third axis are updated. The direction of the selected two axes may be modified by entering a valid direction in the appropriate textbox. As soon as the Return key is pressed after entering a value, the other two axes are updated. On opening the form or a new element selected, a ‘bounding box’ is placed around the extremities of the element and an axes aid placed at the elements origin, whether the element is displayed or not. On entering a new direction for one of the axis, the bounding box is re-orientated to the new orientation. Clicking the Apply button re-orientates the element but retains the bounding box and axes aid. Clicking the Dismiss button removes the aids and dismisses the form. If an element does not have an orientation attribute a warning message is displayed.
6.3.3
Setting Orientation using Rotate
Rotating elements using the Appware in PDMS is carried using a Rotation Axis, the position and direction of which are set by the user. Refer to Chapter 8, Introduction to Model Editor, for details of graphical rotation of elements. Selecting Orientate>Rotate… from the main menu displays the Rotate form: When the form is displayed, a Rotation Axis aid is placed at the origin of the CE. The aid shows the default direction of the axis and cardinal angle labels show the direction of positive rotation.
The origin of the Rotation Axis may be re-positioned using the Rotate form menus.
www.aveva.com 104
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Cursor form menu contains the following options: • Element – this option prompts the user to pick an element in the graphic view. The Rotation Axis is placed at the origin of the picked element. • Design Point – this option prompts for the selection of a Point, i.e. a Ppoint. • Pline – this option prompts for the selection of a Pline on a SCTN or GENSEC. • Edge – this option prompts for the selection of a PANE edge. • Defaults… - this option displays the Cursor Defaults form. This form enables the way cursor picks are interpreted when a position is picked in a graphical view. The Pick Options setting specify how a pick along a linear item is to be interpreted as a position. The choices are: Snap – (default) The position will be at whichever end of the item is nearest to the cursor. The textbox next to this option is not applicable in the current context. Proportional – a proportion, between 0 and 1, is entered in the adjacent textbox. The derived position will be at this proportion of the item’s length from the end nearest to the cursor.
Distance – a distance is entered in the adjacent textbox. The derived position will be at this distance from the end nearest to the cursor towards the cursor position A negative distance will give a position beyond the end.
Exact - The position will be exactly at the picked point.
The Pick Qualifier setting specifies how many picks will be used to identify the position, and how a single position is to be constructed from multiple picks. The choices are:
Single pick - the position will be as determined by the Pick Options setting for a single pick.
Mid-point of two picks - each of two picks will be interpreted as determined by the Pick Options setting and then the mid-point of the two will be constructed to give the final position.
Centroid of multi-picks - each of two or more picks will be interpreted as determined by the Pick Options setting and then the centroid of the points will be constructed to give the final position. Pressing the Esc key terminates the picking.
L
Any modified cursor defaults will remain in force for all subsequent picking operations until they are reset. The Intersection menu options enables a position to be defined by picking two directional items using the cursor in a graphical view. The derived position will be at the intersection of the two items or, if they do not actually intersect, at a point on the first picked item which corresponds to the projection of the second item onto the first.
The menu and submenu options enable any combination of the following types of directional item:
www.aveva.com 105
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Element - this option prompts the user to pick any element which has its principal axis pointing through or towards the required position. • Design Point - this option prompts the user to pick any design point , which is aligned through or towards the required position. • Pline - this option prompts the user to pick any Pline which is aligned through or towards the required position. • Edge - this option prompts the user to pick any PANE edge which is aligned through or towards the required position. If the Rotation axis position is set using one of the methods described above, the Rotate form automatically updates the coordinate information. The coordinates may be edited or set manually by entering values in the appropriate axis textbox. Having positioned the Rotation Axis, its direction may be set by entering a direction in the Direction textbox. If necessary, the wrt (with respect to) textbox may be used to identify the element whose axis system is to be used as the reference. The required rotation angle is entered in the Angle (º) textbox. The entry may be positive or negative depending on the rotation direction required. A different element may be selected for rotation position by using the pull-down at the top of the form: The pull-down has the following options: • • •
CE – this option uses the CE as the element to move Pick – this option allows an element to be selected from a graphical view. List – this option uses the elements in the current list. All elements in the list are rotated.
Clicking the Apply button on the Rotate form rotates the selected element(s). Clicking the Apply button again will rotate the element(s) again.
www.aveva.com 106
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 4 Clear the Drawlist. Select Utilities>Training Setup… from the main menu to display the Training Setup form. Select the Foundations tab if not the current tab.
Click the Delete TRA.SITE and add MESS Site radio button. Click the Apply button. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form. The SITE TRA.SITE has been deleted and the SITE TRA.SITE.MESS added to the databases and displayed in the 3D view. The TRA.SITE has been modified to introduce some design errors and is now named TRA.SITE.MESS. These design errors may be grouped into three categories: • Size errors - some primitives have one of their size attributes incorrectly set. The task is to identify which attribute is wrong and correct its value. • Positional errors - equipment items are incorrectly positioned or primitives are incorrectly positioned within the equipment. The task is to correctly position the equipment and the primitives. • Orientation errors - equipment items or primitives within an equipment are incorrectly orientated. The task is to correctly orientate equipment and primitives. Note: All equipment and primitives should be orientated on an orthogonal axis.
www.aveva.com 107
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The following is a list of the Design errors for each piece of Equipment: TANK1 • The equipment Orientation should be Y is North and Z is Up with respect to the World • CYLI1 – the Position should be at Up 1500 with respect to its owner • BOX1 – the Ylength attribute should be 2850 TANK2 • CONE1 – the Dtop attribute should be 1500 • CYLI1 – the East position should be 2600 with respect to the World • PYRA2 – the North position should be 0 with respect to its owner • PYRA1 – the Up position should be the same as Pyramid 2 • NOZZ TANK2-N2 – the nozzle must be re-orientated by 90º. PUMP1 • The equipment Up position should be 350 with respect to the World • The drive shaft cylinder, CYLI1, must be re-orientated by 90º • DISH2- must be connected to the motor cylinder TANK1 Corrections •
Select Design>Equipment from the main menu to enter the Equipment application.
•
Make TANK1 the CE in Design Explorer. Select Orientate>Axes… from the main menu to display the Orientate form. Note that the wrt textbox shows /*, i.e. the orientation is expressed with respect to (wrt) the World (/*). Change the Y setting from E 45 N to N and press the Return key. Note that the bounding box rotates. Also note that X changes to E and Z changes to U, i.e. the orientation of the equipment is Y is N and Z is U. Click the Apply button to rotate the equipment and then the Dismiss button.
•
Expand the TANK1 element in Design Explorer and make CYLI1 the CE. Select Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu to display the Explicit Position form. Note that the position is expressed with respect to the World. Enter owner in the wrt textbox and press the Return key. www.aveva.com Note that the wrt 108
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
textbox has changed to /TANK1, i.e. the owner of the cylinder, and the co-ordinates have changed to express the position with respect to the equipment. Enter 1500 in the Up text box and press the Return key. Note that the bounding box has changed position to the new location. Click the Apply button to reposition the cylinder and then click the Dismiss button. •
Make BOX1 of TANK1 the CE. Select Modify>Attributes... from the main menu to display the Modify Attributes form. Note that the Ylength attribute value is currently 6000. Left click on the Ylength entry in the form grid to display the Ylength textbox at the bottom of the form. Enter a value of 2850 in the Ylength textbox and press the Return key. Click the Apply button and note that the Ylength value has been updated on the form to the entered value and the box has changed length. Dismiss the form by clicking the close button in the top right hand corner of the form.
TANK2 Corrections •
Make CONE1 of TANK2 the CE. Select Modify>Attributes… from the main menu to display the Modify Attributes form. Note that the Dtop attribute value is currently 4000. Left click the Dtop entry in the form grid to display the Dtop textbox at the bottom of the form. Enter a value of 1500 in the Dtop textbox and press the Return key. Click the Apply button and note that the Dtop value has been updated on the form to the entered value and the cone has changed shape. Dismiss the form by clicking the close button in the top right hand corner of the form.
•
Make CYLI1 of TANK2 the CE. Select Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu to display the Explicit Position form. Note that the position is expressed with respect to the /TANK1. Enter world in the wrt textbox and press the Return key. The coordinates will change to be with respect to the World. Enter a value of 2600 in the East textbox and press the Return key. Note that the bounding box has changed position to the new location. Click the Apply button to re-position the cylinder and then click the Dismiss button.
•
Make PYRA2 of TANK2 the CE. Select Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu to display the Explicit Position form. Note that the position is expressed with respect to the World. Enter /TANK2 in the wrt textbox and press the Return key. Note that the co-ordinates change to be expressed with respect to TANK2, i.e. the owner. Enter 0 in the North text box and press the Return key. Click the Apply button to re-position the pyramid and then click the Dismiss button.
•
With PYRA2 still as the CE, Select Query>Attributes… from the main menu to display the Attributes form. Note that the Position Z value is 625, i.e. Up 625. Check the Track current element checkbox, if not already checked, to toggle the option on. Graphically select, or select from Design Explorer, PYRA1 of TANK2 to make it the CE. Note that the Attributes form now displays the attributes for PYRA1. Note that the Position Z value is -875, i.e. Down 875. Therefore, PYRA1 needs to be moved up by 875+625 = 1500. Dismiss the Attributes form. Select Position>Relatively (BY)… from the main menu to display the Position By form. Enter a value of 1500 in the Up textbox and press the Return key. Note that the new position for the element is displayed. Click the Apply button to re-position the pyramid and then click the Dismiss button to remove the form.
•
•
Make NOZZ TANK2-n2 the CE. Select Orientate>Rotate… from the main menu to display the Rotate form. Select Cursor>Element from the form menu and graphically pick the nozzle. Note that the rotation axis is displayed at the origin of the nozzle and the rotation axis origin co-ordinates and direction, with respect to itself, are displayed on the Rotate form. Change the Rotation Axis direction to Up by entering U in the textbox and pressing the Return key. Note that the graphical aid is now pointing in the Up direction and the 0/90/180/270 text aids are showing the direction of positive rotation. Enter a value of -90 in the Angle(º) textbox and press the Return key. Click the Apply button to rotate the nozzle. Note that the nozzle has rotated to the correct position, i.e. it now mates with the flange on the connecting pipe. Click the Dismiss button to remove the form.
PUMP1 Corrections •
Make PUMP1 the CE. Select Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu to display the Explicit Position form. Note that the position is expressed with respect to the /TANK2. Enter world in the wrt textbox and press the Return key. The coordinates will change to be with respect to www.aveva.com the World. Enter a 109
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
value of 350 in the Up textbox and press the Return key. Note that the bounding box has changed position to the new location. Click the Apply button to re-position the pump and then click the Dismiss button. •
Zoom in to the pump. Make CYLI PUMP1-CYL2 the CE in Design Explorer. Select Orientate>Rotate… from the main menu to display the Rotate form. Select Cursor>Design Point from the form menu. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the CYLI and note that the element is outlined in white and three ‘dots’ are displayed, one at each end and one in the centre of the cylinder. These are the cylinders Ppoints.
See section 9.1.3.1 for an explanation of primitive Ppoints. •
Move the pointer over the central ‘dot’ and note that the pointer display changes as it is moved over the ‘dot’ and the Ppoint’s identity is displayed in the secondary prompt area at the bottom of the screen. When the pointer has changed, release the left mouse button to display the rotation axis at the centre of the cylinder. Enter N in the Direction textbox and press the Return key to change the rotation axis direction. The Angle(º) textbox should still have -90 displayed. If, not, enter a value of 90 in the Angle(º) textbox. Click the Apply button to rotate the cylinder and then click the Dismiss button.
•
Zoom out and locate DISH PUMP1-DISH2 and make it the CE in Design Explorer. The dish needs to be placed at the end of CYLI PUMP1-CYL5 of the pump to complete the representation of the pump motor. Manipulate the displayed elements such that PUMP1-DISH2 and PUMP1-CYL5 can both be viewed as closely as possible.
•
Select Position>Relatively (BY)… from the main menu to display the Position By form. On the Positioning Control Toolbar select Ppoint from the Pick Type options list and Snap from the Pick Method options list. Click and hold down the left mouse button on PUMP1-DISH2 and move the pointer over the centre of the flat face of the dish to highlight a Ppoint. When the pointer display changes, release the mouse button. Note that a Measure Distance Start text aid is displayed at the Ppoint location. Click and hold down the left mouse button on CYLI PUMP1-CYL5 and move the pointer over the centre of the cylinder face closest to the dish to highlight a Ppoint. When the pointer display changes, release the mouse button. Note that a New Position text aid is displayed at the Ppoint location and an aid line, showing the measured distance is shown from the dish Ppoint to the cylinder Ppoint. Also note that measured value has been placed in the relevant text box on the Position By from, i.e. West 4567. Click the Apply button to re-position DISH PUMP1-DISH2. Click the Dismiss button on the form.
www.aveva.com 110
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The corrected model elements should now look like this:
www.aveva.com 111
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 112
CHAPTER 7
7
General Utilities
This chapter describes various general utilities that are useful when working with PDMS.
7.1
Lists
Lists are a temporary collection of elements on which operations can be performed that affect all the members of the list. There can be many lists, although only one list can be current at any one time. Lists are not saved at the end of a Design session although the data may be saved to file and restored in a future Design session. The current list is displayed in the pull-down on the Default Toolbar. If there are no defined lists the pull-down will display No list. Selecting the Create/Modify Lists button from the Default Toolbar or selecting Utilities/Lists… from the main menu displays the Lists/Collections form. The first step in creating a List is to create the list itself. Selecting Add>List… from the form menu displays the Create List form.
A name for the list is entered in the Description text box. Clicking the OK button will create the list and add the name to the List pull-downs on the form and the Default Toolbar. This is now the current list The name of the list should be meaningful and convey some mnemonic as to the contents of the list so that it may be used again, if required. The format of the list may be selected from the Format pull-down at the bottom of the form. The list can be displayed with the element Name only, the element Description only or a concatenation of Name + Description. Having created the list, selecting Add from the form menu again gives the following options: • CE – this option adds the CE to the list. • CE Members – this option adds the members of the CE to the list. • Identified – this option enables items to be picked from a 3D View by left clicking them. When the selection is finished, pressing the Esc key adds the selected elements to the list.
www.aveva.com 113
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Selection… - this option displays the Add to List form that enables a search of the databases to be performed, using different methods, to find elements to add to the list. One or more PDMS element types may be entered in the Selection text box to filter the elements searched for. The selection may be further refined by adding a valid PML expression to the with Rule text box. The source of the selection is made by clicking the For Element or From List – radio buttons. The selection may also be made by specifying a volume, either explicitly or with a 3D cursor, and selecting whether part of or the entire element is within the volume by checking the appropriate check box. Whichever method is chosen to select the items to add to the list, the selected items will appear in grid of the Lists/Collections form. The contents of the list, once populated, may be modified by adding additional items or removing items from the list. The Remove pull-down on the form menu has similar options to the Add menu described previously but with the following additions: • from List – this option removes the element highlighted in the list from the list. • All – this option removes all elements from the list. The elements in the list may be highlighted in the graphical view by checking the Highlight check box at the top of the form. PDMS commands may be directly applied to the list by entering valid PDMS syntax in the text box at the bottom of the form and clicking the Action button. It is recommended that you use this option only if you have a good understanding of PDMS syntax, otherwise use the list in conjunction with the applicable forms from the Appware.
www.aveva.com 114
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.2
Groups
A group element can hold in its members list a number of design elements from any combination of hierarchic levels and may also span across multiple databases. Appropriate design operations can act upon the individual elements in the group simply by carrying out the operation on the group. Groups are particularly useful when there is a need to create a secondary hierarchy of elements. For example, a set of elements for a project may span more that one site, if this is the case it is difficult to identify where in the hierarchy these elements occur. With a group its members can be queried and the hierarchy of elements contained within it easily seen. A group is a Design database element in its own right and is, therefore, stored in the hierarchy for use in later sessions or by other modules that have access to Design elements. The elements that make up a group are: A Group World (GPWL) is the top level administrative element and may own many group sets. A Group Set (GPSET) contains groups of items. A Group Item (GPITEM) is the element from another part of the hierarchy. A GPSET may own many GPITEMs Group sets may be nested within other group sets. To achieve this structure a GPSET can own another GPSET or a GPITEM can point back to a GPSET. Selecting Create>Group… from the main menu displays the Group form. The form contains its own Explorer to browse the hierarchy, a pulldown to select a Group World, a grid to display the Group Sets in the Group World and a Group Members grid to display the Group Item data. The form is automatically populated with all the GPWL and GPSET elements in the current MDB if they have been previously defined. The data in the Group Members grid data is defaulted to the first GPSET in the first GPWL. The form may be dismissed by selecting Control>Close from the form menu.
L
GPITEM elements do not appear in the Design Explorer or the form Explorer. The actual names of the members of the group set are displayed instead. With a GPSET as the CE, entering Q MEM in the Command Window displays a list of the GPITEM elements. Querying the attributes of any GPITEM will show an attribute called SItem that holds the actual element name.
www.aveva.com 115
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.2.1
Creating Group Worlds
Selecting the Create>Group World… from the form menu displays the Create Group World form. The form may also be displayed by right clicking in the form Explorer and selecting Create Group world… from the pop-up menu.
A Name for the Group World, and other attributes, may be entered into the relevant textboxes on the form. Clicking the OK button on the Create Group World form creates the new Group World (GPWL) in the hierarchy below the highest level significant element of the CE.
7.2.2
Creating Group Sets
Selecting the Create>Group Sets… from the form menu displays the Create Group form. The form may also be displayed by right clicking on the GPWL element in the form Explorer and selecting Create Group Sets… from the pop-up menu.
A Name for the Group Set, and other attributes, may be entered into the relevant textboxes on the form. Clicking the OK button on the Create Group form creates the new Group Set (GPSET) owned by the select GPWL.
7.2.3
Managing Groups
All Group Sets available in the current MDB are displayed in the Available group sets list on the Groups form. Selecting a Group Set from this list displays the members of the Group Set in the grid below the list. Populating a Group Set with elements and modifying the contents of a Group Set is achieved by using popup menus from the form Explorer and the Group Members grid. Right clicking on an element in the form Explorer displays a pop-up menu that has the following options:
L
For the following menu options that use the term Current Element, it is the CE highlighted in the form Explorer, and not that of the Design Explorer, that is being referred to.
• Add Current Element – this option adds the CE to the current group set.
www.aveva.com 116
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Add Current Element Members – this option adds the CE members to the current group set. • Remove Current Element – this option removes the CE from the current group set. • Remove Current Element Members – this option removes the members of the CE from the current group set. • Add From Current List – this option adds the members of the current list to the current group set. • Remove from Current List – this option removes members of the current list from the current group set. • 3D View – this option has a sub-menu that has options to add and remove the CE from the 3D View. Right clicking anywhere in the Group Items grid displays a pop-up menu that has the following options: • Remove All From Group – this option removes all elements from the current group set and clears the Group Members grid. • Remove Selected From Group – this option removes the selected elements in the Group Members grid from the current group set.
L
Multiple selections may be made in the grid using standard Windows selection methods.
• 3D View – this option displays a sub-menu with the following options: Add All – this option adds all of the items in the current group set to the 3D View. Add Selected – this option adds the items selected in the Group Members grid to the 3D View. Remove All – this option removes all items in the current group set from the 3D View. Remove Selected - this option removes the items selected in the Group Members grid from the 3D View. •
Navigate – this option navigates in the Design Explorer to the item selected in the Group Members grid. If there is a multiple selection in the Group Members grid this option will navigate to the first selected item in the grid.
www.aveva.com 117
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.3
My Data
The My Data utility may be used to generate collections of database elements that need to be worked on. Each time the My Data form is opened, in any of the modules that use it, i.e. Draft, Design, Spooler, etc., the data collections generated will be displayed. This enables elements to be easily transferred between these modules. The content of My Data persists between applications and module switching, as well as between design sessions. The data stored is per user, per project in the C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\Aveva\PDMS\ProjectSettings directory, where is the users Windows login name and is the project’s three character short code. This means that, for example, in Design elements may be added to My Data and a module switch to Draft to would use the same data. Selecting Display>My Data from the main menu displays the My Data form. The form is re-sizeable and dockable and contains an upper pane displaying the current elements and collections in a grid gadget, a fold-up panel that displays actions that may be taken with My Data and a fold-up panel that displays the contents of a collection in a grid gadget. Elements may be added to My Data by dragging and dropping from the Design Explorer or by using the My Data option on the Drawlist pop-up menu. If two or more items are simultaneously chosen from the Drawlist pop-up menu, they will be placed in My Data as a New Collection and appended with a sequential number. A new collection may also be created by selecting the New Collection link label at the bottom of the pane.
Clicking on a collection in the top panel displays the collections contents in the Contents fold-up panel. Elements may be added to this collection by dragging and dropping into the Contents panel from the Design Explorer. Elements that are displayed in the upper pane may be placed into a collection by dragging and dropping them into an existing collection in the upper pane. The elements will no longer be displayed in the top pane but may be viewed in the Contents panel by clicking on the collection. The Remove Selected link label at the bottom of the pane will remove any element that is highlighted in the pane from the My Data list.
Right clicking on an element or a collection in the upper pane grid highlights the entry and displays a pop-up menu that has the following options: • Remove from My Data – this option removes the highlighted element or collection from My Data.
www.aveva.com 118
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Resolve Inconsistency – An inconsistency occurs when elements referred to in My Data, either individually or within a collection, are deleted by another user in a separate session and a Get Work is performed.
The element or collection is highlighted by a red triangle containing an exclamation mark. In the case of a collection, the Contents fold-up panel also marks the inconsistent element in the same way Selecting the Resolve Inconsistency option from the pop-up menu removes the affected element from My Data or the collection.
• Edit – this option displays a sub-menu with Cut, Copy and Paste options that enable elements to be cut or copied from one collection and pasted into another. • Rename – this option allows a collection to be renamed. This option is greyed out for elements. • 3D View - this option displays a sub-menu that with Add, Add Connected, Add Within Volume, Remove, Highlight and Unhighlight options that function as previously described for the Design Explorer pop-up menu. • Datal Listing… – this option displays the Datal Listings Options form, from which a database listing for the highlighted element or collection can be written, either to a file or to the Command Window. • Find referred elements…- this option displays the MyData Reference Extender form that shows connected elements or catalogue references for an element or all of the elements in a collection. Right clicking in a blank area of the upper pane grid displays a pop-up menu. The New collection option creates a new collection and the Arrange By submenu allows the entries to be sorted alpha-numerically by Name or Type. This may also be achieved by clicking on the column headers. Right clicking on an element in the Contents panel grid highlights the entry and displays a pop-up menu with the following options: • Remove selected from Collection – this option deletes the highlighted option from the collection. Multiple selections can be made form the grid prior to right clicking. All selected elements will be removed from the collection if this option is used. • Navigate To – this option navigates in the Design Explorer to the item selected in the grid. If there are multiple selections this option is greyed out on the sub-menu. The remaining options on this sub-menu are the same as previously described for the upper pane pop-up menu.
www.aveva.com 119
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Right clicking in a blank area of the Contents panel grid displays a pop-up menu. The Select All option selects all of the elements in the collection and the Arrange By sub-menu allows the entries to be sorted alpha-numerically by Name, Type and DB This may also be achieved by clicking on the column headers. The Actions panel contains four actions that may be performed on the selected element or collection in the top pane. The link labels are greyed out until an element or collection is selected. The Highlight Elements and Unhighlight Element options are greyed out if the selected element or collection is not in the 3D View.
7.4
Search Utility
The Search utility enables the databases to be searched for specific items. The scope of the search may be defined and the items may be identified by different criteria including name, type, attributes or any combination of these. The search results are output to a grid gadget and may be grouped, sorted and filtered. The results may be added to the 3D View, added to My Data, printed and exported to Excel.
Selecting Display>Search Utility… from the main menu displays the Search form. The form is re-sizeable and dockable and contains an area to specify the item to be searched for; a fold-up panel to specify Search Filters, a fold-up panel to apply Attribute Filters to the search and a fold-up panel for Saved Searches.
The functionality available on the main form and the fold-up panels is described in the following section.
7.4.1
Specifying the Items to Search for
The items to be searched for may be specified by names that contain a specific string, one or more element types or a combination of both. A character string may be entered in the Name Contains textbox. The string may be of any length and contain any permissible name character. The search is case sensitive. Any strings that have been previously specified in the session are retained in the options list for the duration of the session and are, therefore, available for further use. The options list also contains a Clear History option that will remove any previously entered strings from the list. One or more item types may be entered in the Item Types textbox. If more than one item type is entered they must be separated by a space, comma or semi-colon, i.e. EQUI PIPE, NOZZ;TEE. The entries may be any valid item types and are not case sensitive. The options list contains an ALL option (the default) which, if selected, will find all item types in the current search scope. Any item type(s) that have been previously specified in the session are retained in the options list for the duration of the session. The options list also contains a Clear History option that will remove all any previously entered item types from the list.
www.aveva.com 120
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.4.2
Search Filters
The Search Filters fold-up panel contains two methods to specify the Scope of Search, a hierarchical search below a ‘ceiling’ or a volumetric search within a specified volume. Each of these methods may be used separately or they may be combined.
7.4.2.1 Hierarchical Search below a ceiling Checking the Beneath Item checkbox activates the search below a ‘ceiling’ option. When the Search utility is first opened during a session, the default scope will be set to the World element (/*) as the ‘ceiling’ of the search within the current database, e.g. Design, if within the Design application. The ‘ceiling’ may be changed by entering a valid item name in the textbox or clicking the CE button to set the current element as the ‘ceiling’ for the search. The database items entered in the Beneath Item options list will be retained throughout the current session, however, this history can be cleared by selecting Clear History from the options list. The database types listed in the In Database options list are those that are available to the user in the current MDB. The options list will automatically update if the item exists in any of the databases types. Similarly, if the database type is changed in the options list then the database item currently displayed will be checked. If it is not found in that database type, the ceiling of the search scope will be reset to world.
7.4.2.2 Volumetric Search Checking the In Volume checkbox activates the Of Item and Explicit Volume radio buttons. Selecting the Of Item radio button enables an item name to be entered in the textbox. The database items entered in the Of Item options list will be retained throughout the current session, however, this history can be cleared by selecting Clear History from the options list. Checking the Explicit Volume checkbox activates the textboxes in the Lower Limit and Upper Limit areas of the fold-up panel, enabling the opposing corners of a box to be specified by entering the X, Y and Z co-ordinates to define the volume explicitly. The Wholly Within and Wholly & Partially within radio buttons, which are applicable to both methods of volumetric search, specify whether the found items exist completely or partially within the specified volume.
www.aveva.com 121
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.4.3
Attribute Filters
The Attribute Filters fold-up panel enables one or more attribute filters may be set for the search. The specified attributes will apply to each item type listed. If there is more than one attribute filter specified then the found items will satisfy all of the attribute filters.
The Add Filter and Delete Filter link labels at the bottom of the fold-up panel enable an attribute filter to be added and deleted as required.
7.4.3.1 Attribute Having added an attribute filter, moving the cursor over the Attribute column highlights a pull-down that contains the attributes of the specified item type. The required attribute may be selected from the list. Entering the first one or two letters will find the required attribute in the list, if present. If no item type has been specified, i.e. only a partial Name string has been specified, only the Name attribute is available. If multiple item types have been specified, attributes for all item types are available.
7.4.3.2 Operator Moving the cursor over the Operator column highlights a pull-down that contains a list of valid operators. The contents of the pull-down depend on the attribute selected as not all operators are valid for all attributes. A suitable operator may be selected from the list. Most of the operators are self explanatory, however, the following operators work as described: The In the List operator enables a list of values (separated by spaces) to be specified for the attribute value. The values may be numeric or non-numeric, depending on the attribute type. For example, for the AREA attribute using an In the List operator with a value of 0 1 3 would find items which have AREA attribute equal to either 0, 1 or 3. The In the Range Operator enables a range of two numeric values to be specified, i.e. an upper and a lower limit, inclusive. For example, for the AREA attribute using an In the Range operator with a value of 1 10 would find items which have AREA attribute equal to any numeric value between and including 1 and 10
www.aveva.com 122
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.4.3.3 Value
The Value column will either display a textbox, to allow a numeric an alpha-numeric entry to be made, or an options list with relevant options that may be selected from the list.
7.4.4
Saved Searches The Saved Searches fold-up panel enables regularly used or complex searches to be saved for later use.
Clicking the Create “Saved Search” Based on Current Search Criteria link label displays the Create Saved Search form. Entering a suitable name in the Name textbox activates the OK button. Clicking the OK button saves the search criteria to a file located in the Local Settings directory of the users computer, e.g. C:\Documents and Settings\\Local Settings\Application Data\Aveva\PDMS\Searches.Local Settings, where is the users Windows login name.
The entered name is displayed in the saved searches options list and is available in future sessions of PDMS.
Saved searches are also displayed in the options list on the Search toolbar.
7.4.4.1 Executing Saved Searches Saved searches may be executed from the Saved Searches fold-up panel of the Search form or from the Search toolbar. On the Search form, after selecting the required saved search to execute from the options list, clicking the Search button adjacent to the options list executes the selected search. On the Search toolbar, after selecting the required saved search to execute from the options list, clicking the Run Search button executes the selected search.
7.4.4.2 Deleting Saved Searches Saved searches may be deleted from the Saved Searches fold-up panel of the Search form, or from the Search toolbar. On the Search form, after selecting the required saved search to delete from the options list, clicking the Delete Selected Saved Search link label deletes the selected search.
www.aveva.com 123
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
On the Search toolbar, after selecting the required saved search to deleted from the options list, clicking the Delete Search button deletes the selected search. Using either method to delete a selected search displays a Delete Search confirmation message. Clicking the Yes button deletes the search and clicking the No button does not delete the search.
7.4.5
Executing the Search from the Search form
Having specified the search criteria, clicking the Search button on the Search form executes the search with the specified criteria. The search may display results quickly or it may take some time, depending on the scope and complexity of the search and Attribute Filters. As soon as the search is started, the Search button changes to a Stop button. Clicking the Stop button stops the search and displays the results found so far, if any. The number of items found is displayed adjacent to the Display Search Results link label at the top of the form.
www.aveva.com 124
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.4.6
Search Results
On completion of the search the utility automatically opens the Search Results form, if not already open, and populates the grid with the items found for the given criteria.
L
The Search Results form may be opened at ant time by selecting Display>Search Results from the main menu.
The Search Results form displays the results in a grid gadget. Each column of the grid represents an attribute of an item in the database(s). The columns to be displayed can be specified and the results can be grouped, sorted and filtered. Selected results may be dragged and dropped into a 3D View or added to My Data and the complete grid may be printed or exported to Excel. Some attributes in the results grid may be edited individually or by bulk editing.
7.4.6.1 Displaying Multiple Search Results By default the search results are displayed in a tab on the Search Results form named Search Results 1. Multiple search results may be displayed by checking the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox in the top area of the Search form. If unchecked (the default) all search results will be displayed in the tab named Search Results 1, i.e. the previous search results will be overwritten.
If checked, the search results will be displayed in a new tab named Search Results n, where n is the next sequential number of the displayed tabs. For Saved Searches the tab name is the same as the Saved Search name, providing the Search button in the Saved Searches fold-up panel is used.
If the Saved Search is saved anywhere other than Local Settings the tab name will be in the form where Location is the pathname to the location of the Saved Search. If a Saved Search tab is already open, running the Saved Search again will re-use the tab. www.aveva.com 125
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Clicking the down arrow button at the bottom right corner of the form displays a pop-up menu containing all of the tab names. Selecting a tab from the menu name makes the tab current. Right clicking on any of the tabs displays a pop-up menu with the following options: • Synchronise Search with Tab – this option sets the parameters on the Search form to those used to create the Search Results displayed in the selected tab, including any Attribute Filters • Close Tab – this option closes the selected tab. If multiple search results are open and the Display Search Results in Separate Tab checkbox is unchecked, all subsequent searches will be displayed in the default tab named Search Results 1.
7.4.6.2 Results Grid Pop-up Menu
Right clicking on any row in the grid displays a pop-up menu with the following options:
• Remove Selected Rows – this option removes the selected rows from the results grid.
L
Multiple rows may be selected using standard Window selection methods.
• Navigate To – this option navigates to the element in Design Explorer. If multiple rows are selected this option is disabled. • 3D View – this option has a sub-menu that enables the elements in the selected rows to be added to, removed from or highlighted/un-highlighted in, the 3D view. • Add to My Data – this option adds the elements in the selected rows to My Data.
L The My Data form does not have to be open. 7.4.6.3 Results Grid Options and Attribute Editing Right clicking in any column header displays a pop-up menu. Some options can be enabled and disabled, i.e. clicking on these options toggles them on and off. If any of these options are enabled a check icon is displayed to the left of the option in the pop-up menu.
The menu has the following options:
www.aveva.com 126
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Column Setup… - this option displays the Table Column Setup form: The Table Column Setup form enables columns to be added to or deleted from the results grid and the columns to be re-ordered. Clicking the Add Column link label displays a new line in the column grid. Any valid attribute may be entered into the Attribute column and column heading text entered into the column heading. Clicking the Delete Selected Columns link label will delete single or multiple column selections. The columns may be re-ordered by dragging a column header into a new position. Clicking the OK button will make the changes to the columns but they will not come into affect until a new search is initiated. • Clear Results – this option clears the results grid. • Enable Group Sorting – this option toggles group sorting. If enabled, the Grid sort area is displayed above the column headers. One or more column headers may be dragged into this area to group the grid data by.
• Enable Filtering – this option toggles column filtering. If enabled, the grid data may be filtered on one or more columns.
• Enable Column Summaries – this option toggles column summaries. If enabled, columns that contain numeric data may be summarised and a summary symbol Σ is displayed in the column header.
Clicking the Σ symbol displays the Select Summaries form. Various summaries may be selected using the appropriate checkboxes. The summaries are displayed at the bottom of the grid when a new search is initiated.
• Enable Column Sort – this option toggles column sorting. If enabled, columns may be sorted alphanumerically, either ascending or descending, by clicking on the column header. An arrow is displayed in
www.aveva.com 127
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
the column header to show that is sorted and the direction of the sort. Only one column may be sorted at a time. •
Suppress “unset” values – this option toggles the suppression of unset attribute values. If this option enabled attribute values that are set to unset are not displayed.
• Suppress “Nulref” values – this option toggles the suppression of attributes with a null reference. If this option is enabled attribute values that have a null reference (Nulref) are not displayed.
LIf columns are added that are based on attributes that have no meaning to some of the items found by the search, e.g. a POS attribute has no meaning to a PIPE, the results grid shows the following symbol:
• Interaction Mode – this option enables element attributes to be edited, either singularly or in bulk, and has a sub-menu. Clicking on these options toggles them on and off. If an option is enabled a check icon is displayed to the left of the option in the pop-up menu. All options are mutually exclusive, i.e. only one may be enabled at any one time. The Read only option does not allow any editing of the data in the results grid. The Single Cell Edit option enables attributes of elements displayed in the grid to be edited one cell at a time. The cell contents are update and highlighted when the cursor is clicked in another cell. Some attributes may not be edited, e.g. Type or Owner, cannot be edited as they are set by the system. Text or numeric attributes are edited by entering appropriate values in the cells. For boolean attributes, e.g. Lock, an options list is displayed in the cell from which the appropriate value, i.e. true or false, may be selected.
Right clicking in an editable cell displays a pop-up menu with various options that may be used on single cells only.
The Bulk Cell Edit option enables multiple cells to be edited by using Cut, Paste, Fill Down or Fill Up options available from a pop-up menu.
www.aveva.com 128
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Right clicking in a single editable cell displays the pop-up menu with the Copy option enabled. Copying the data in the cell and right clicking in a single cell or right clicking a multiple cell selection in the same column enables the Paste option by which the data may be entered into the selected cel(s).
L Data cannot be copy and pasted into another column using this option. Selecting multiple cells and right clicking displays the pop-up menu with the Fill Down and Fill Up options enabled. Choosing these options will fill the selected cells with the data from the top or bottom cell(s) in the selected cell group respectively, depending on the option chosen. • Feedback Colours – this option enables feedback colours to be set for cell display and editing and has a sub-menu.
The sub-menu has the following options:
Read Only Cell Colour… - this option displays the Read Only Cell Colour form: The form displays the basic 16 PDMS colours. Selecting a colour highlights the cells containing non-editable attributes (Read Only attributes). This does affect editable attribute cells if the Read Only Interaction Mode is set. The Reset button resets the colour to the previously set colour. The More… button displays a larger form with 256 colours. The default colour is white. Edit Success Colour… - this option displays the Feedback Success Colour form: Selecting a colour sets the edit success feedback colour, i.e. when a cell is successfully edited it is highlighted in the selected colour. The Reset button resets the colour to the previously set colour. The More… button displays a larger form with 256 colours. The default colour is cyan. Edit Fail Colour… - this option displays the Feedback Fail Colour form: Selecting a colour sets the edit fail feedback colour, i.e. when a cell edit fails it is highlighted in the selected colour. The Reset button resets the colour to the previously set colour. The More… button displays a larger form with 256 colours. The default colour is salmon. Reset Default Feedback Colours – this option resets the feedback colours to their defaults.
www.aveva.com 129
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
L When a cell has been edited and is highlighted in the success or fail colour, positioning the cursor over the cell displays a tooltip with feedback on the edit. This is particularly useful if the edit has failed.
• Reset Cell Feedback – this option un-highlights any cells that have been highlighted by cell editing. It does not affect the Read Only feedback cell colour. • Refresh – this option refreshes the data in the Search Results grid from the source data. • Export to Excel – this option displays a standard Windows Save As dialogue where a location and filename may be specified for the excel file. If grouping and filtering have been applied, the Excel file will contain the groups and/or filters. • Print Preview – this option displays the results grid in a standard Windows Print Preview dialogue where it may be printed. Right clicking on a row in the results grid selects and highlights the row and displays a pop-up menu that has the following options: • 3D View – this option has a sub-menu that has options to add the selection to, and remove from the selection from, a 3D View as well as highlighting and un-highlighting the selection in the 3D View. • Add To My Data – this option adds the selection to My Data. • Remove Selected Rows – this option removes the selected rows from the results grid.
L
Multiple selections may be made in the grid using standard Windows selection methods.
www.aveva.com 130
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.5
User Grid Systems The User Grid Systems utility creates 3D rectangular and radial grids in Design. Grids may be project wide or local to a specific Plant area or a room in a module or building. Selecting Utilities>User Grid Systems… from the main menu displays the User Grid Systems form. The form is re-sizable and contains a pane to display available grid systems and a number of options for formatting the displayed grid. The form menu enables grids to be created and modified and the co-ordinates of a picked point to be displayed in both World and Grid co-ordinate systems. Grids are stored in a Design database and have their own hierarchy structure as shown:
L 7.5.1
Although user grid systems are stored in a Design database they do not appear in the Drawlist.
Creating 3D Rectangular Grids
Selecting Create>3D Rectangular Grid… from the User Grids Systems form menu displays the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form. The form has two tabs, the Options tab where the grid axis offsets, line IDs and labels are specified and Position & Orientation tab where the location and orientation of the grid are specified. On the Options tab the Display area of the form contains radio button options that control how the grid is labelled in the 3D View. Refer to section 7.5.3 for Grid Display Options. The X Axis, Y Axis and Z Axis areas of the form enable grid labels, line IDs and offsets to be specified for each axis individually.
A label for the respective axis may be entered in the appropriate Label text box. The label should be meaningful and will suffix the Grid Axis (GRIDAX) and Gridline (GRIDLN) element names in the Design Explorer. The labels X, Y and EL (elevation) are commonly used for the X, Y and Z axes respectively.
www.aveva.com 131
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The line IDs are used to identify individual gridlines and suffix the label in the Design Explorer. The ID format may be alphabetic or numeric and may be incremented by any step. The Offsets are relative values from the previous gridline. Negative or positive values may be entered which will determine how the grid is distributed around the grid origin. Clicking the Autofill… button on the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form displays the Autofill Rectangular Grid System form. This form enables the labels, range and interval of offsets and the ID formats to be specified. When first opened the form is populated with default values which can be adjusted accordingly. Having specified the required data clicking the OK button will dismiss the form and autofill the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form as shown below. The auto filled Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form may be edited manually to make the final adjustments to the grid. It is often easier to use the autofill function and edit than enter all the data from scratch. The Preview button will display the grid in the current 3D View to so that it may be visually inspected before creation. The Set View Limits to Grid button zooms the view such that the specified grid fills the 3D View.
www.aveva.com 132
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Position & Orientation tab enables the grid origin to be positioned and the grid to be orientated. The Position area of the form enables the grid origin to be placed explicitly by entering East/West, North/South and Up/Down, i.e. X, Y and Z, coordinates in the relevant text boxes. The direction may be changed by using the three pull-downs. Checking one of the Lock checkboxes disables the editing of that co-ordinate. The position may also be specified by using the Positioning Control Toolbar and graphically selecting a position in the 3D View. See 6.2.1 for details of the Positioning Control Toolbar.
The Orientation area of the form enables the grid to be orientated in three ways: 1. Clicking the Through three points button prompts for the graphical selection of three points to define the plane of the grid. When the orientation points have been picked, the Y is and Z is text boxes are updated with new directions defined by the grid plane. 2. Clicking the Through origin and two points button prompts for the graphical selection of two points which, together with the origin point, define the plane of the grid. When the orientation points have been picked, the Y is and Z is text boxes are updated with new directions defined by the grid plane. 3. The orientation can also be set by entering a direction in the Y is and Z is text boxes. The X direction is automatically derived, and is displayed beneath the two text boxes. Only one direction may be altered at a time so it may require two or more entries to re-orientate the grid to the required orientation. A grid name may be entered in the Name text box at the bottom of the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form. This name will be displayed on the User Grid Systems form so that it may be selected for future use or modification Clicking the Save button creates the grid elements and displays the grid in the 3D View. If no Grid World elements are in a writeable Design database, one is created automatically. If more than one writeable Grid World exists, the new grid will be placed in the first available one in the hierarchy. The Close button closes the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form.
www.aveva.com 133
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.5.2
Creating 3D Radial Grids
Selecting Create>3D Radial Grid… from the User Grids Systems form menu displays the Reference 3D Radial Grid form. The form has two tabs, the Options tab where the angles, radii, offsets, line IDs and labels are specified and Position & Orientation tab where the location and orientation of the grid are specified. On the Options tab the Display area of the form contains radio button options that control how the grid is labelled in the 3D View. See section 7.5.3 for Grid Display Options. The Angles, Radii and Z Axis areas of the form enable grid labels, line IDs, radial line angles, concentric circular line radii and Z axis offsets to be specified.
A label for the angles, radii and Z axis may be entered in the appropriate Label text box. The label should be meaningful and will suffix the Grid Axis (GRIDAX) and Gridline (GRIDLN) element names in the Design Explorer. The labels A, R and EL (elevation) are commonly used for the angles, radii and Z axis respectively. The line IDs are used to identify individual gridlines and suffix the label in the Design Explorer. The ID format may be alphabetic or numeric and may be incremented by any step. The Angles are in degrees, counter clockwise from East (X). The Radii are absolute values from the grid origin and the Offsets are relative values from the previous gridline. Clicking the Autofill… button on the Reference 3D Radial Grid form displays the Autofill Radial Grid System form. This form enables the labels, range and interval of offsets and the ID formats to be specified. When first opened the form is populated with default values which can be adjusted accordingly. Having specified the required data clicking the OK button will dismiss the form and autofill the Reference 3D Radial Grid form as shown below. The auto filled Reference 3D Radial Grid form may be edited manually to make the final adjustments to the grid.
www.aveva.com 134
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
It is often easier to use the autofill function and edit than enter all the data from scratch. The Preview button will display the grid in the current 3D View to so that it may be visually inspected before creation. The Set View Limits to Grid button zooms the view such that the specified grid fills the 3D View.
The Position & Orientation tab enables the grid origin to be positioned and the grid to be orientated. This tab functions as previously described for Rectangular Grids.
www.aveva.com 135
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.5.3
Grid Display Options When one or more grid systems have been created the Displaying grid system area of the User Grid Systems form is activated. Selecting a grid system from the Grid System pane and clicking the Display button displays the selected grid in the 3D View and activates the Set View Limits to Grid button which may be used to set the display limits to the whole grid. The Hide button removes the selected grid system from the view and reactivates the Display button. The radio buttons in the Display area of the form control the labelling of the grid. The options produce the following results: • Axes only displays the gridlines only with a label at the grid origin.
• Gridline IDs displays the gridline IDs prefixed with the specified label.
• Spacings displays the spacing between grid lines for rectangular grids and the spacings between concentric circles and the angles between radial lines for radial grids.
www.aveva.com 136
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Coordinates displays the co-ordinates of the grid lines, prefixed by the specified label, for a rectangular grid and the distance from the origin of the concentric circles and the cumulative angle of the radial lines for a radial grid.
These display settings are also available in the Display area of the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid and Reference 3D Radial Grid forms. Clicking the Select display axes… button displays the Plant Grid Axes form, if the currently selected grid is rectangular, or the Radial Grid Axes form if the currently selected grid is radial. The Plant Grid Axes form enables the display plane for each axis to be toggled On or Off and the location of the plane to be selected, i.e. on a gridline. The display of an axis plane is toggled using the checkbox adjacent to the appropriate plane. The plane is located using the pull-down for the appropriate plane. The list contains all of the gridlines for that axis. For example, displaying all three axes for the grid, i.e. checking all three checkboxes and selecting X3 for the X Axis plane and YB fro the Y Axis plane gives the following result.
L
When the Plant Grid Axes or Radial Grid Axes forms are opened, the grid is removed from the 3D display and the Display button activated. Clicking the display button after the OK (or Cancel) buttons have been clicked on the Grid Axes forms, re-displays the grid with the changes, if any.
www.aveva.com 137
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Radial Grid Axes form enables the elevation, i.e. the Z Axis location, to be specified at which the grid is displayed. The pulldown shows all of the Z Axis locations specified when the form was created or modified. Selecting a location displays the whole grid at the selected elevation.
L
The 0 label indicates the grid origin.
7.5.4
Modifying User Grid Systems
Highlighting the grid to be modified in the Grid Systems area of the User Grid Systems form and selecting Modify>Selected Grid System… from the form menu displays the Modify Grid (nnnn), where nnnn is the name of the selected grid.
The displayed form depends on the type of the selected grid. Both forms are identical to the forms used for creating the two grid types except that they are populated with the current settings of the selected grid and the Name text box is greyed out
Having made the required changes to the grid, clicking the Save button on the Modify Grid form displays a confirmation message to replace the existing grid.
7.5.5
Deleting User Grid Systems
Highlighting the grid to be modified in the Grid Systems area of the User Grid Systems form and selecting Delete>Selected Grid System… from the form menu deletes the grid from the form and from the 3D View if displayed.
www.aveva.com 138
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.5.6
Displaying Picked Positions in Grid Coordinates
A position may be picked from a 3D View and displayed in terms of Grid co-ordinates. Selecting Display>Picked position in grid cords… from the User Grid Systems form menu prompts for a position to be picked and activates the Positioning Control Toolbar. Having picked the position the Display Grid Coords form is displayed, showing the position in both World and grid coordinates. The grid used for the coordinates is the current grid selected from the User Grid Systems form. The grid name is displayed on the Display Grid Coords form.
L 7.6
The referenced grid does not have to be displayed to obtain the position in grid coordinates.
Measuring
PDMS provides utilities for measuring linear distances and angle from displayed elements in a 3D view. Distance Measure and Angle Measure are available from the Utilities toolbar:
Distance Measure is also available by selecting Query>Measure Distance… from the main menu. Bothe utilities are used in conjunction with the Positioning Control toolbar.
7.6.1
Distance Measure
In the following example pumps P1501A and P1501B have been added to the 3D view.
Clicking the Distance Measure button or selecting Query>Measure Distance… from the main menu displays the Measure form, activates the Positioning Control toolbar and displays the prompt ‘Measure distance start (Snap) Snap:’.
L
The prompt will change depending on the pick method setting on the Positioning Control toolbar, e.g. ‘Measure distance start (Mid-Point) Snap:’
Which point is picked for the start of the measure operation depends on the settings of the Positioning Control toolbar.
For example, if the settings are Element/Snap and an equipment (EQUI) element is picked, the measure distance start point will be the origin of the picked element. However, if a steelwork section (SCTN) element is selected and the same settings used, the measure distance start point may be the start, end or nearest snap point, depending on the pick position.
www.aveva.com 139
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Picking a start point displays a text aid at the picked point and changes the prompt to ‘Measure distance end (Snap) Snap:’. The measure distance end point may then be picked using the same Positioning Control toolbar settings or the settings may be changed before the end point is picked.
When the second point is selected an aid line is drawn between the picked points and aid text graphic displays the true distance between the points. The distance is displayed in the Measure form in the Distance textbox. The true direction between the picked start and end points is displayed in the Direction textbox.
The cardinal direction offsets between the two picked points are displayed in the Relative offset X, Y and Z textboxes.
The direction and relative offsets are expressed, by default, with respect to the World coordinate system. They may be expressed in terms of another frame of reference by entering a named element, CE, Owner or db reference no. in the wrt textbox on the Angle Measure form.
www.aveva.com 140
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Once a measure distance task is performed, the form will remain active, enabling other distances to be measured, until the Dismiss button is clicked.
7.6.1.1 Using Graphics Picks The graphics in the 3D view may also be used to derive points for measuring. Selecting pick type Graphics on the Positioning Control toolbar enables the graphics to be used with any of the pick methods. Clicking and holding the left mouse button over an element in the 3D view highlights the edges of the element and displays a graphics cursor. Moving the cursor over the element(s) changes the cursor shape depending on what is ‘below’ the cursor at the time, for example a surface, a corner or an edge.
7.6.2
Angle Measure
In the following example the STRU /PIPEWAY has been added to the 3D view.
Clicking the Angle Measure button on the Utilities toolbar displays the Angle Measure form and the prompt ‘Measure angle root of angle (Snap) Snap:’
L
The prompts will change depending on the pick method setting on the Positioning Control toolbar.
The Positioning Control toolbar is also activated. With appropriate settings on the Positioning Control toolbar, an origin point, i.e. the root of the angle’, may be picked from a 3D view. A graphics label is displayed at the selected angle root point.
www.aveva.com 141
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Once the root point of the angle has been picked the prompt changes to ‘Measure angle first point (Snap) Snap:’. The first point for the measured angle may then be picked in the 3D view. A graphics label is displayed at the selected first point in the 3D view.
Once the first angle measure point has been picked the prompt changes to ‘Measure angle second point (Snap) Snap:’. The second point for the measured angle may then be picked in the 3D view. A graphics label is displayed at the selected first point in the 3D view.
Once the second angle measure point has been picked, a graphics label displayed the measured angle with a graphics aid arc between the first and second points.
The angle, together with the directions of the first and second picked points from the root of the angle point, is displayed on the Angle Measure form.
www.aveva.com 142
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The measured angle is expressed, by default, with respect to the World coordinate system. The measured angle may be expressed in terms of another frame of reference by entering a named element, CE, Owner or db reference no. in the wrt textbox on the Angle Measure form.
www.aveva.com 143
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
7.7
Claimlists in Multiwrite Databases
Where Multiwrite databases are used, the modification of elements in the databases is controlled by the use of Claimlists which, essentially, stops an element being owned by more than one user at a time and avoids conflicting data being written to the databases by sequential saves by different users. Multiwrite databases have a claim mode that is set when the database is created: • If the claim mode is Explicit the element must be claimed before it can be worked on. • If the claim mode is Implicit when a user starts to modify an element it is automatically claimed. In this mode an element may also be claimed explicitly. Selecting Utilities>Claimlists… from the main menu displays the Multiwrite Claim Lists form. The Claimlist options list can be set to: • Active Claimlist – this is the users Claimlist. Lists of all the significant elements claimed by the user are displayed in the elements list. • Others Claimlist – the elements list displays all significant elements claimed by all other users in the MDB, except those in the Active Claimlist. The name of each user is displayed along side the significant elements and the names are added to the Claim List options list so that an individual user Claim List may also be selected.
L
Clicking on any element in a Claim List will navigate to it in the Design Explorer.
Elements are claimed and unclaimed using the form menu options. Control
Update
Updates the list. The list is automatically updated when it is displayed and the Active Claimlist is updated when elements are claimed using the form, however, in other cases the list may not show all claimed elements unless this option is used.
Close
Closes the form.
Claim / Unclaim
L
The Unclaim menu is only active when there are members in the Active Claimlist.
CE
Claims and unclaims the CE and all the elements below it.
CE Members
Claims or unclaims the members of the CE and all the members below it, but not the CE.
www.aveva.com 144
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
CE only
Claims or unclaims the CE only and not any hierarchy below it. This can be used, for example, to change an attribute such as a description which will not affect any elements below the CE.
CE Members only
Claims or unclaims each member of the CE only and not the hierarchy below.
Pick
Enables items to be claimed and unclaimed by graphically picking them in a 3D View.
List
This option has a sub-menu that displays the available lists. Selecting a list claims or unclaims all of the elements in the selected list.
In addition, the Unclaim option has the following: Unclaim All
Unclaims all the elements in the Active Claimlist.
Selected
Unclaims all the elements selected in the elements list.
Colour
Highlight…
Displays the Claimlist Colours form.
Selecting a colour highlights the elements in the Claimlist in that colour in all 3D Views. Only elements already in the Drawlist are highlighted, elements are not automatically added to the Drawlist. Different colours may be used for each Claimlist.
Unhighlight
Displays a sub-menu that un-highlights the CE, all Elements in the selected Claimlist or All elements in the 3D Views.
Databases
MDB
Displays all of the claimed elements in the databases in the MDB.
DBs
The sub-menu displays all databases in the MDB. Selecting a database from the sub-menu list displays all claimed elements in that database.
If there are many elements in the Claimlist they may be separated into pages by selecting an entry, i.e. 15, 50, 100, All, from the Number of results per page options list. The numbers of pages are displayed on the left hand side of the form header. The ► and ◄ buttons page down and up respectively. Elements must be unclaimed before other users can access them. Other users must do a Getwork before they can see the changes. Elements that have been claimed and modified cannot be unclaimed until a Save Work is performed. Switching modules or exiting PDMS will unclaim all elements.
www.aveva.com 145
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 5 Select Utilities>Training Setup… from the main menu to display the Training Setup form. Select the Foundations tab if not the current tab.
Click the Delete TRA and MESS Sites radio button. Click the Apply button. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form. The SITE TRA.SITE.MESS has now been deleted from the database. This exercise uses the Stabilizer Area01 model. Lists •
Empty the Drawlist and add the following SITEs to the 3D view SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 SITE-CIVIL-AREA01 SITE-PIPING-AREA01 SITE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01
•
Set the view direction to Iso3 and click the Walk to Drawlist button.
•
Select Utilities>Lists… from the main menu to display the List/Collections form. Select Add>List… from the form menu to display the Create List form. Enter EQUIPMENT in the Description textbox, press the Return key and then click the OK button. Note that the description now appears in the List options list on the List/Collections form.
•
Make the zone ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 the CE and on the List/Collections form select Add>CE Members from the form menu. The equipment elements have now been added to the list. Check the Highlight checkbox and note that the equipment elements are displayed in the 3D View in the highlight colour. Uncheck the Highlight checkbox.
www.aveva.com 146
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Left click on C1101 in the list grid. Select Remove>from List from the form menu. C1101 has now been removed from the list. Check the Highlight checkbox again and note that C1101 is not highlighted.
•
Make the ZONE ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 the CE. Select Add>List… from the form menu to display the Create List form. Enter PIPE_100 in the Description textbox, press the Return key and then click the OK button.
•
Select Add>Selection… from the form menu to display the Add to List form. In the Selection textbox enter BRAN and in the with Rule textbox enter HBOR EQ 100. This specifies to add only Branch elements with an Hbore (Head Bore) attribute equal to 100mm. Click the for Element radio button and enter CE in the adjacent textbox and then click the Apply button. The pipe branches that meet the criteria are added to the list, Click the Dismiss button.
•
Left click on branch 150-A-3/B1 in the List/Collections form and note that it is now the CE in Design Explorer. In the Command Window enter Q HBOR and press the Return key. The answer Hbore 100mm is displayed.
•
Create a new list named PIPE_150 and add to it Branches with an Hbore greater or equal to 150mm. The expression HBOR GE 150 should be used.
•
Click the Dismiss button on the Add to List form and then select Control>Close from the List/Collections form menu. Open the Active List options list and note the three lists that may be selected.
Groups •
Navigate to the World in Design Explorer. Select Create>Group… from the main menu to display the Groups form. Right click in the form Explorer and select Create Group world… from the pop-up menu to display the Create Group World form. Enter TRAINING_GROUP_WORLD in the Name textbox and press the Return key. Leave the three other attribute textboxes at unset. Click the OK button to create the GPWL element.
•
Right click on the GPWL in the form Explorer and select Create Group Sets… from the pop-up menu to display the Create Group form. Enter ALL_EQUI in the Name textbox and press the Return key. Leave the other two attribute textboxes at unset. Click the OK button to create the GPSET element.
•
In the form Explorer, expand SITE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01, right click on the ZONE-EQUIPMENTAREA01 and select Add Current Element Members from the pop-up menu. Note that the equipment elements are added to the grid gadget.
•
Expand the GPWL and GPSET elements and note the contents of the Group Set. Remove the ZONEEQUIPMENT-AREA01 from the Drawlist and then right click on the ALL_EQUI GPSET in the form Explorer and select 3D View>Add CE from the pop-up menu. The equipment elements should now be displayed in the 3D View again.
•
Select Control>Close from the Groups form menu to dismiss the form.
My Data •
Empty the Drawlist so there is nothing displayed in the 3D View.
•
Select Display>My Data from the main menu to display the My Data form. Expand ZONE-PIPINGAREA01 and 100-B-1 in the Design Explorer. Click and hold down the left mouse button on branch 100B-1/B1 and drag and drop it into the upper pane on the My Data form. The element name is now displayed in on the form. Add 100-B-1/B2 and 100-B-1/B3 to the My Data form in the same way.
www.aveva.com 147
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Click the New Collection link label on the My Data form to create a new collection that is displayed in the upper pane. Right click on the New Collection in the upper pane, select Rename from the pop-up menu and enter Branches as the name for the collection.
•
Drag and drop the branches, one by one, from the upper panel into the Branches collection. Left click on the Branches collection and open the Contents fold-up panel and note that the three Branch elements are now in the Branches collection.
•
Drag and drop all of the Branch elements from Pipe 100-B-2 from Design Explorer directly into the Branch collection in the upper pane. Note that these elements are now displayed in the Contents foldup panel.
•
Create a new collection named Equipment. With this collection highlighted in the upper pane, drag and drop the EQUI items in ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 from Design Explorer directly into the Contents fold-up panel. Note that these items are added to the new Equipment collection.
•
Left click the Equipment collection in the upper pane and select Add to 3D View from the Actions foldup panel. All EQUI items in the collection have been added to the Drawlist and are displayed in the 3D View.
•
Right click on the Branches collection in the upper pane and select 3D View>Add from the pop-up menu. Select Highlight in the Actions fold-up panel and note all the piping elements have been highlighted. Select Unhighlight from the Actions fold-up panel to un-highlight the piping elements.
•
Create a collection for the steelwork in ZONE-STRUCTURAL-AREA01 and add it to the 3D View.
•
Click the Close button on the My Data form header to dismiss the form.
Search Utility •
Select Display>Search Utility from the main menu to display the Search form. Enter EQUI in the Item Types textbox. Note that the Beneath Item check box is checked and the default value of /*, i.e. the World, is set in the adjacent textbox. Click the Search button to initiate the search.
•
The search results are displayed in the Search Results form displayed automatically when the search is complete.
•
The default grid on the Search Results form has only two columns, NAME and TYPE. Right click in the grid header row and select Column Setup… from the pop-up menu to display the Column Setup form. Click the Add Column link label to add a new entry to the column list and in the Expression column enter Zone. Left click in the Heading column and note that Zone is automatically entered. This can be edited, if desired. Click the OK button on the Column Setup form. Note that the Search Results form has been updated to include the new column.
•
Enter PIPE in the Item Types textbox on the Search form in addition to the EQUI entry, i.e. EQUI PIPE. Separate the entries with a space or a comma. Check the In Volume checkbox and click the Of Item radio button. Navigate to Zone /ZONE-PIPING-AREA01 in Design Explorer and enter CE in the Of Item textbox. Click the Wholly Within radio button at the bottom of the Search Filters fold-up panel.
•
Click the Search button again to re-run the search. Note that the search has found all the EQUI and PIPE elements wholly within the volume of the Area01 Piping Zone.
•
Right click in the grid header row and select Enable Group Sorting from the pop-up menu. Note that the group sorting area is now displayed above the results grid. Click and hold down the left mouse button on the Zone column header and drag it to the left until it is the first column, the red arrow aids help to determine the new position for the column. When in position, release the left mouse button.
www.aveva.com 148
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Left click on the Zone column header to sort the results by this column. Left click the Zone column header again to reverse the sort. Drag the Zone column header into the Group area at the top of the grid to group the results by the owning Zone. Note that there are two groups in the grid. Expand each one and note the content of each. Drag the Zone column header back to the
•
Add one more column for the attribute Function to the Search Results form. Note that the Function attribute is unset for all the PIPE and EQUI elements. Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Feedback Colours>Read Only Cell Colour… from the pop-up menu to display the Read Only Cell Colour form. Click the Green button and then click the Dismiss button. Note that the Zone and Type columns are now highlighted in green on the Search Results form.
•
Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Feedback Colours>Edit Success Colour… from the pop-up menu to display the Edit Success Cell Colour form. Click the Magenta button and then click the Dismiss button.
•
Left click on the Type column header to sort the results in ascending order by Type. Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Interaction Mode>Single Cell Edit… from the pop-up menu.
•
Left click in the Function cell for the top row of the grid, i.e. an EQUI element, to highlight the unset entry and enter Equipment in the cell. Left click in any other cell and note that the Function cell has been highlighted in Magenta.
•
Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Interaction Mode>Bulk Cell Edit… from the pop-up menu.
•
Select the Function cells for all of the EQUI elements in the results grid, i.e. a multiple cell selection. Right click in any of the Function cells and select Fill Down from the pop-up menu. Note that all the EQUI elements now have their Function attribute set to Equipment and are highlighted in Magenta.
•
Repeat this process for all the PIPE elements in the results grid by editing the Function attribute of the bottom grid entry to Pipe and use the Fill Up option to modify the other cells.
•
Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Reset Cell Feedback from the pop-up menu to un-highlight the edited cells. Right click on the column header row again and select Refresh from the pop-up to show that the Function attributes have been changed at the data source.
•
Right click on the column header row in the Search Results form and select Export to Excel… from the pop-up menu to display the Save As form. Note the destination folder is set to pdmsuser and enter Equipment in the File name textbox. Click the Save button to save the Equipment.xls file.
•
Locate the Equipment.xls file in the folder C:\AVEVA\plant\PDMS12.0.x\pdmsuser and double click it to open the file. Close the Search Results form.
•
On the Search form enter BRAN in the Search for Item Types textbox, make the Zone /ZONE-PIPINGAREA01, in the Site /SITE-PIPING-AREA01, the CE and click the CE button to the right of the Beneath Item textbox on the Search form. Open the Attribute Filter fold-up panel if not already open. Click the Add Filter link label to create a new filter. Select HBOR from the Attribute options list, select Greater than from the Operator options list and enter 100 in the Value textbox.
•
Click the Search button to obtain the search results. Right click in the grid header row and select Column Setup… from the pop-up menu. Highlight the Pos and Ori rows and click the Delete Selected Columns link label to delete the two columns. Create two new columns on the Column Setup grid, HBOR (Head Bore) and TBOR (Tail Bore). Export the results to an Excel file named Pipe Branches.xls. Close the Search and Search Results form.
www.aveva.com 149
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
User Grid Systems •
Empty the Drawlist and make the World the CE. Select Utilities>User Grid Systems… from the main menu to display the User Grid Systems form. Select Create>3D Rectangular Grid… from the form menu to display the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form. Click the Autofill… button to display the Autofill Rectangular Grid System form. Click the OK button on the form, accepting the default Autofill values. Note that the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid has now been populated with values.
•
Click the Preview button and the Set View Limits to Grid button, displaying the grid in the 3D View. Enter Rectangular_Grid in the Name textbox and click the Save button. Note that GRIDWL has been created in Design Explorer containing a GRIDSY named Rectangular_Grid. Click the Close button on the Reference 3D Rectangular Grid form.
•
On the User Grid Systems form click the Gridline IDs radio button and then click the Display button to display the grid with the selected annotation option. Note that the Gridline IDs are now displayed on the grid. Try the other Display options.
•
Click the Select display axes… button to display the Plant Grid Axes form. Check the Display plane through X axis offset at and the Display plane through Y axis offset checkboxes. Leave the option lists at their default values of X0, YA and EL0 and click the OK button. Note that the grid has been removed from the 3D View. Click the Gridline IDs radio button on the User Grid Systems form and then click the Display button. Note the changes to the displayed grid.
•
Display the Plant Grid Axes form again and try different combinations of the different planes from the option gadgets and note the different combination of grid planes.
•
Create a 3D Radial Grid named Radial_Grid using the Autofill option on the Reference 3D Radial Grid form. Enter A in the Label textbox for the Angles on the Autofill Radial Grid System form. Display the radial grid and try the different labelling and axis options.
•
Name the Grid World (GRIDWL) TRAINING-GRIDS.
•
Create a 3D Rectangular Grid named Area01_Grid with the following data:
L
This grid will be used in a later exercise.
www.aveva.com 150
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 151
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 152
CHAPTER 8
8
Introduction to Model Editor
This chapter introduces the use of the Model Editor for the graphical re-positioning and re-orientation of selected elements.
8.1
Model Editor Mode
Model Editor is a mode of operation in Design that enables selected elements to be re-positioned and reorientated graphically using the mouse pointer. Model Editor Mode may be toggled on and off by clicking the Model Editor button on the Model Editor Toolbar or selecting Edit>Model Editor from the main menu. When in Model Editor Mode, the prompt in the primary prompt area reads Modify: Model Editor may be used to manipulate Graphical Selections, consisting of either a single item or groups of items. See section 5.2 for details of Graphical Selections.
When a Graphical Selection is present a Locator Handle is displayed. The Locator Handle is used to graphically manipulate the Graphical Selection.
8.1.1
The Locator Handle The Locator Handle is a collection of individual graphical manipulation handles grouped together. The Locator Handle can be used to drag the entire Graphical Selection to a new position or rotate the entire Graphical Selection through an angle about a selected axis. This combination of direct graphical manipulation handles offers you the ability to move selected items constrained in a direction or in a plane, or rotate the selection about an axis.
www.aveva.com 153
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
8.2
Overview of Model Editor Operations
The following section gives an overview of Model Editor operations. Details of each operation are given later in this Training Guide.
8.2.1
Movement
A Graphical Selection is moved using linear and planar handles on the Locator Handle. Dragging a linear or planar handle with the mouse pointer moves the current Graphical Selection. The movement is made in steps, the size of which is controlled by the Linear Increment. This allows the Graphical Selection to be positioned accurately in relation to its original position. The Graphical Selection can be moved until it is aligned with another item in the display by using Locator Handles or by dragging with Feature Highlighting mode switched on.
8.2.1.1 Linear Movement
Clicking and dragging one of the three Linear Movement Handles constrains the movement of the selection to be in the direction of the selected axis.
8.2.1.2 Planar Movement
Clicking and dragging one of the three Planar Movement Handles constrains the movement of the selection to be in the plane of the selected planar handle.
8.2.2
Rotation
The Graphical Selection is rotated using a Rotation handle. The selection rotates in angular steps as it is dragged with the mouse, the size of which is controlled by the Rotation Increment. This allows the Graphical Selection to be rotated accurately from its original orientation. The Graphical Selection can be rotated until an axis of the Locator Handle is aligned with another item in the display by using Locator Handles or by dragging with Feature Highlighting switched on.
Clicking and dragging one of the three Rotation Handles constrains the rotation of the selection to be about the axis corresponding to the selected rotation handle.
www.aveva.com 154
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
8.2.3
Alignment
The Graphical Selection can be moved or rotated until it aligns with a point, Ppoint, Pline or an edge in the model. The target points and lines are called Features. The origin of the Locator Handle is the reference datum for aligning the Graphical Selection.
8.2.4
Locator Handle as a Frame of Reference
The Locator Handle can be moved or rotated independently of the Graphical Selection. This allows a datum to be set for movement and alignment operations, or to set an axis of rotation about which the Graphical Selection can be rotated.
8.2.5
Feedback
The Locator Handle changes shape to show movement or rotation constraints. Movement and rotation feedback for freehand operations is displayed both in the 3D View and on the status bar. This allows both world position and displacement from the starting position to be shown. The distance values are output in the current session units and style. If feature alignment is in use, feedback is given on features as the mouse pointer passes over them, and graphical feedback is provided to help achieve the correct alignment in a 3D model.
8.2.6
Unconstrained Positioning
The Locator Handle provides functions for positioning the Graphical Selection constrained in a given direction or in a plane. However, it is sometimes necessary to specify a new position without any constraints applied to movement of the Graphical Selection. An unconstrained position can be specified by typing world co-ordinates into a form, by typing a 3D offset from the current Location Handle position, or by snapping to a Point feature. These functions are provided from a right click pop-up menu on the Locator Handle.
8.2.7
Undo and Redo
Undo and Redo functions in Model Editor Mode allow stepping backwards or forwards through one or more movement or rotation operations. Undo and Redo operate on a sequence of direct graphical manipulation operations in the Model Editor. Undo/Redo operations can also take place outside of Model Editor Mode. If the Undo operation involves moving into or out of Model Editing mode, then the switch into that mode happens automatically, and the
www.aveva.com 155
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Model Editor button and menu option reflect the change. The selection set and handle appropriate to the editing operation that was being used will also be restored.
8.2.8
Performance
The speed of interactive selection and dragging operations is dependent on both the specification of the hardware being used, and on the complexity of the model displayed in the 3D View. Generally, it is advisable to minimise the size and complexity of the displayed model in order to obtain good interactive feedback from the system. Performance tips when using Model Editor: • Display only those elements that are necessary for the modification being performed. As the Graphical Selection is dragged on the screen the display is continuously redrawn. • Avoid using large graphical selections. It may be better to make bulk moves in small groups. • Avoid drawing the model with high levels of detail. For example, do not display the model with holes drawn; do not use a fine arc tolerance. • Avoid drawing the model with Ppoints switched on.
8.3
The Selection Menu
The Selection menu on the main menu bar contains commands for setting properties of the Locator Handle and the Graphical Selection.
The Selection menu on the main menu bar has the following options:
• Feature Highlighting – this option toggles feature highlighting on and off. In Model Editor Mode, pressing the F key will also toggle feature highlighting on or off. • Set Increments… - this option displays the Set Increments form: The Linear increment determines the incremental steps when the Graphical Selection is dragged using the linear or planar movement handles. The Fine linear increment determines the fine incremental steps using the up and down cursor arrow keys The Angular increment determines the incremental steps when the Graphical Selection is rotated using the rotation handles. • Set Handle Colour – this option displays a sub-menu where by which the colour of the Locator Handle may be chosen from a limited set of colours. • Drag Image – this option has a sub-menu that enables the style of visual feedback when a dragging operation using the Locator Handles to be determined. The sub-menu options are Solid, Translucent and Wireline.
www.aveva.com 156
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Select Rectangle – this option has a sub-menu that enables the Wholly Within or Wholly and Partially Within options to be set when creating a Graphical Selection with a Fence selection.
8.4
Positioning and Orientation using the Locator Handle
The Locator Handle provides three ways to move or rotate a Graphical Selection: • Dragging the linear, planar or rotation handles freehand with the mouse pointer. • Aligning with points, P-points, P-lines or straight lines (edges) on other displayed plant items. • Typing in offset distance or angular displacement values.
8.4.1
Aligning the Graphical Selection with points or lines on other displayed items
When aligning a Graphical Selection with other plant items in the displayed model, Feature Identification Mode is entered, i.e. the mouse pointer is sensitive to finding features on the Design graphics. Features are points, straight lines (edges), P-points or P-lines. Points are located at vertices on the model, such as the corner of a box, and at the mid-point of lines. Lines are straight edges on the model (Design Aid graphics cannot be used as a feature). Feature Identification Mode is toggled on and off by selecting Selection>Feature Highlighting from the main menu, or by pressing the F key when the mouse pointer is over a 3D Model Editor View, and the Model Editor is active. Some operations turn on Feature Identification Mode temporarily to allow a feature to be picked, e.g. Edit>Move Selection>Snap To Point. Once the required feature is identified, the mode reverts to its state before the command was actioned.
8.4.2
Automatic Scrolling
If the target location for a drag operation is outside of the 3D view, the mouse pointer can be moved to an edge of the view, where the view will pan automatically up, down, left or right according to the 3D view edge that the mouse pointer hits. The mouse pointer must move in order for the panning to continue. This may necessitate you making a small movement of the pointer near to the view edge to keep the pan operation going. This technique for panning the view is appropriate for locating a target position that is just out of view.
8.4.3
Linear Movement Handles
The Linear Movement handle allows the movement of the Graphical Selection to be constrained in the direction of the linear handle axis. The size of each step of the movement is defined by the current Movement Increment. To initiate a linear drag, click and hold the left mouse button over one of the linear movement handles. With the left button still held, moving the mouse drags the Graphical Selection constrained in the selected direction. As the mouse moves over a linear handle, the pointer symbol changes to the linear drag pointer.
8.4.3.1 Moving one Movement Increment at a Time If the movement increment is small relative to the magnification of the 3D view, it can be difficult to move the mouse freehand to a precise displacement from the Locator Handle's original position.
www.aveva.com 157
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Fine control over positioning can be achieved by dragging with a linear handle so that it is close to the required position then, while continuing to hold down the mouse button, press the plus (+) or minus (-) key on the numeric keypad. This moves the Graphical Selection by one movement increment in the direction of the linear handle if + is pressed, or in the opposite direction if - is pressed. Using the cursor arrow keys in this way moves the Graphical Selection by 0.1 of the current movement increment for each press of the key.
8.4.3.2 Feedback When moving a selection in a constrained direction, the Locator Handle changes to a cut-down version of the full handle to show the direction of movement. The current World position of the Locator Handle is displayed on the status bar, and an offset from the original position of the handle is displayed on the 3D View.
8.4.3.3 Linear Movement Handle Pop-up Menu
Right clicking on a linear drag handle displays a pop-up menu with the following options:
• Enter Value… - this option displays the Move Selection form: The textbox corresponding to the selected axis is activated so that a value may be manually entered. A +ve value will move the Graphical Selection in the positive axis direction and a –ve value will move the Graphical Selection in the negative axis direction. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button moves the Graphical Selection. • Align with Feature… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be positioned in relation to another object on the screen but forces the Graphical Selection to move along the selected axis. Linear drag can align with a point feature or a line feature.
www.aveva.com 158
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Snap to Point… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be moved to a Point feature. The Graphical Selection is not constrained to move along the direction of the Linear Handle. • Move Handle – this option has a sub-menu that enables the Locator Handle to be moved independently of the Graphical Selection, thus changing the datum for the next operation on the Graphical Selection. The Enter Value…, Align with Feature… and Snap to Point… sub-menu options function in the same way as described for moving the Graphical Selection except they move the entire Locator handle. • Cancel – this option cancels the current Model Editor operation.
8.4.4
Planar Movement Handles
Each of the planar movement handles constrains the drag operation such that the Graphical Selection moves only in the plane of the selected handle. The handle moves in steps determined by the current Movement Increment setting. To initiate a planar drag, click and hold the left mouse button over one of the planar movement handles. With the left button still held, moving the mouse drags the Graphical Selection constrained in the selected plane. As the mouse moves over a linear handle, the pointer symbol changes to the planar drag pointer.
8.4.4.1 Feedback
A triangle is displayed on the current constraint plane, between the original position of the handle and the current position. The relative movement distances are shown on the sides of the triangle. The current World position of the Locator Handle is displayed on the status bar. All values are shown in the current selected units.
8.4.4.2 Planar Movement Handle Pop-up Menu
Right clicking on a planar drag handle displays a pop-up menu with the following options:
• Enter Values… - this option displays the Move Selection form:
www.aveva.com 159
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The textboxes corresponding to the selected plane are activated so that values may be manually entered. +ve values move the Graphical Selection in the positive relevant axis direction and –ve values move the Graphical Selection in the negative relevant axis direction. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered values and clicking the OK button moves the Graphical Selection. • Align with Feature… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be positioned in relation to another object on the screen but forces the Graphical Selection to move only in the selected plane. Planar drag can align with a point feature or a line feature.
• Snap to Point… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be moved to a Point feature. The Graphical Selection is not constrained to move in the plane of the Planar Handle. • Move Handle – this option has a sub-menu that enables the Locator Handle to be moved independently of the Graphical Selection, thus changing the datum for the next operation on the Graphical Selection. The Enter Value…, Align with Feature… and Snap to Point… sub-menu options function in the same way as described for moving the Graphical Selection except they move the entire Locator handle. • Cancel – this option cancels the current Model Editor operation.
www.aveva.com 160
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
8.4.5
Rotation Handles
The rotation handles allows the Graphical Selection to be rotated around the relevant axis using the current Angular Increment to control the angular step size.
To initiate a rotational drag, click and hold the left mouse button over one of the Rotation Movement Handles. With the left button still held, moving the mouse rotates the Graphical Selection around the selected axis. As the mouse moves over a Rotation Randle, the pointer symbol changes to the rotation drag symbol, and half of the Rotation Handle arc changes to show two arrows
8.4.5.1 Feedback
The angular movement from the original orientation is shown as the Locator Handle is rotated. The angular displacement is also shown in the status bar.
8.4.5.2 Rotation Handle Pop-up Menu
Right clicking on a rotation handle displays a pop-up menu with the following options:
• Enter Values… - this option displays the Rotate Selection about X/Y/Z form: The textbox enables a value, in degrees, to be entered to rotate the Graphical Selection around the specified axis. A +ve value rotates the Graphical Selection in the positive rotation direction and a –ve value rotates the Graphical Selection in the negative rotation direction. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button rotates the Graphical Selection.
www.aveva.com 161
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Orient to Point… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be orientated in relation to another object on the screen but forces the Graphical Selection to rotate only around the selected axis. Rotational drag can align with a point feature or a line feature.
• Align with Direction… - this option allows the Graphical Selection to be rotated to align with the direction of a plane through a selected feature.
• Align with… - this option displays the Enter Direction for X/Y/Z Axis form: Any direction for the specified axis may be entered in the standard direction format. The axis selected depends on the relative position of the rotational drag cursor symbol when the right click is made on the Rotation Handle, i.e. if it is closer to the X axis the then the direction is specified. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button rotates the Graphical Selection. • Rotate handle – this option has a sub-menu that enables the Locator Handle to be rotated independently of the Graphical Selection, thus changing the frame of reference for the next operation on the Graphical Selection.
www.aveva.com 162
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Enter Value…, Orient to Point…, Align with Direction… and Align with… sub-menu options function in the same way as described for moving the Graphical Selection except they rotate the entire Locator Handle. The To World option aligns the Locator Handle with the World co-ordinate system, without rotating the Graphical Selection. The Locator Handle Y axis points North, and the Z axis points Up. • Cancel – this option cancels the current Model Editor operation.
8.4.6
Dragging the Locator Handle Independently of the Graphical Selection
A Locator Handle can be moved independently of the Graphical Selection from the pop-up menus, as describe previously, allowing a datum position to be set for subsequent move operations, or an axis of rotation to be set for subsequent rotation operations. The Locator Handle may be also be dragged independently of the Graphical Selection. Selecting a linear, planar or rotation handle by clicking and holding with the left mouse button down, and then pressing the H key on the keyboard, detaches the Locator Handle from the Graphical Selection. The H key can be used to toggle between moving the Locator Handle on its own, and moving the Graphical Selection with the Locator Handle.
8.5
Graphical Equipment Modification (GEM)
Entering Model Editor Mode, clicking on an equipment item and selecting Edit Equipment from the pop-up menu enables the Graphical Equipment Modification (GEM) facilities. GEM gives pop-up menu options that facilitate graphical modification of the equipment and the primitives that make up the equipment item.
8.5.1
Display Characteristics
Selecting Edit Equipment makes all other elements in the display translucent, including other equipment.
www.aveva.com 163
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Left clicking on a primitive to make it the CE moves the Locator Handle to the origin of the primitive so that the modifications can be made.
Right clicking on a primitive that owns other primitives, i.e. negative primitives, displays a pop-up menu option to edit the primitive, e.g. a BOX: Selecting this option makes all the other primitives in the equipment translucent. Negative primitives are shown in wireline.
GEM is exited by selecting the Exit Equipment Editor option from the right click pop-up menu. This returns the user to Model Editor Mode.
8.6
Positioning and Orientation Using the Edit Menu The Edit menu on the main menu bar works in conjunction with Model Editor Mode. Most of the options are similar or are the same as those available from other buttons or via the pop-up menus from the Locator Handles. The Edit menu has the following options: • Model Editor – this option toggles Model Editor Mode on and off. If on, a check mark appears next to the menu entry. • Undo and Redo – these options Undo or Redo Model Editor actions. These options are only active when Model Editor Mode is on. • Re-Select – this option re-selects the previous Graphical Selection, if any. This option is only active if Model Editor Mode is on.
• Move Selection – this option has a sub-menu:
www.aveva.com 164
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The sub-menu has the following options for moving the Graphical Selection:
Offset in 3D… - this option displays the Move Selection form: Entering values in any of the three axis textboxes moves the Graphical Selection using the Locator Handle as the frame of reference. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button moves the Graphical Selection.
Set 3D Position… - this option displays the Set Position of Selection form: The current position of the Locator Handle, with respect to the World, is displayed. Modifying the values in the textboxes moves the Graphical Selection in the direction, and by the values specified. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button moves the Graphical Selection.
Snap to Point… - this option enables the Graphical Selection to be positioned at a selected position relative to another object in the 3D View. The Locator Handle may be snapped to a point on another object, thus moving the selection. •
Rotate Selection – this option has a sub menu:
The sub-menu has the following options for rotating the Graphical Selection:
To World – this option re-orientates the Locator Handle and the Graphical Selection such that the Y axis of the Locator Handle points in the World North direction and the Z axis points in the World Up direction. About X…, About Y… and About Z… – these options display the Rotate Selection about X/Y/Z form, depending on the axis selected. Entering a value in any of the textbox rotates the Graphical Selection and the Locator Handle around the specified axis. Clicking the Preview button shows the affect of the entered value and clicking the OK button moves the Graphical Selection. o
Move Handle – this option has a sub-menu: The options on this sub-menu as the same as described for the Move Selection sub-menu described above, except that they apply to the Locator Handle only.
www.aveva.com 165
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
o
Rotate Handle – this option has a sub-menu: The options on this sub-menu as the same as described for the Rotate Selection submenu described above, except that they apply to the Locator Handle only.
o
Delete Selection – this option deletes the current Graphical Selection.
www.aveva.com 166
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 6 This exercise corrects the same as errors on the SITE TRA.MESS.SITE as Exercise 4 except that position and orientation errors are corrected using Model Editor. Clear the Drawlist. Select Utilities>Training Setup… from the main menu to display the Training Setup form. Select the Foundations tab if not the current tab.
Click the Delete TRA.SITE and add MESS Site radio button. Click the Apply button. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form. The SITE TRA.SITE or SITE TRA.SITE.MESS is deleted and a new version of SITE TRA.SITE.MESS is added to the database. TANK1 Corrections
• Enter Model Editor Mode either by clicking the button on the Model Editor Toolbar or by selecting Edit>Model Editor from the main menu. • Graphically select TANK1 in the 3D View to make it the CE and display the Locator Handle at the origin of the equipment.
www.aveva.com 167
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Left click and hold on the Rotation Handle that rotates the equipment around the Z axis and move the handle until the feedback information reads 45 and N (or 45 and E, depending on which end of the rotation handle was selected). • Release the left mouse button. The equipment is now correctly orientated.
• Right click on TANK1 and select Edit Members of Equipment from the pop-up menu. Note that all of the other elements in 3D View are displayed semitranslucent. • Select the tank cylinder and note that it becomes the CE and the Locator Handle is displayed at its origin. • Turn on Feature Highlighting by selecting Selection>Feature Highlighting from the main menu or pressing the F key.
• Right click on the Z Linear Movement and select Move Handle>Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. Locate the Ppoint at the bottom of the cylinder by moving the pointer, using the left mouse button, over the cylinder until the Ppoint is displayed and the Through Ppoint Feature text is shown. • Click the left mouse button to place the Locator Handle at the bottom centre of the cylinder.
www.aveva.com 168
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Right click on the Z Linear Movement handle and select Snap to Point… from the pop-up menu. The bottom of the cylinder needs to be located on the top surface of the box that forms the base of the tank. • Move the pointer over the centre of the base box until the top surface Ppoint is located and the cylinder snaps to the point. Click the Ppoint to re-position the cylinder.
• Right click on the equipment and select Exit Equipment Editor from the pop-up menu. Click the Model Editor button to exit Model Editor Mode. • Finish the corrections by modifying the Ylength attribute of BOX1 of TANK1 to 2850, using the Modify Attributes form.
TANK2 Corrections •
Modify the Dtop attribute of CONE1 of TANK2 to 1500 using the Modify Attributes form as described previously. •
Make TANK2 the CE and Graphical Selection. Enter Model Editor Mode, right click on TANK2 and select Edit Members of Equipment… from the pop-up menu.
•
Make CYLI1 the CE, right click the Z Linear Movement handle on the cylinder and select Move Handle>Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. Locate the Ppoint at the bottom of the cylinder by moving the pointer, using the left mouse button, over the cylinder until the Ppoint is displayed and the Through Ppoint Feature text is shown.
•
Click the left mouse button to place the Locator Handle at the bottom centre of the cylinder.
www.aveva.com 169
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Right click the X Linear Movement handle and select Snap to Point… from the pop-up menu. Locate the Ppoint at the top centre of the cone and left click it to move the cylinder to this location.
•
Left click on PYRA2 to make it the CE and move the Locator Handle to the pyramids origin. Right click on the Locator Handle and select Move Handle>Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. Move the handle to Ppoint 2, i.e. the central bottom face of the pyramid.
•
Right click on the XY Planar handle and select Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. The bottom of the pyramid needs to be aligned in the XY plane to the centre of the cylinder.
•
Move the pointer over the Ppoint on the top of the cylinder and note that the pyramid is aligned with this cylinder but the movement is constrained in the XY plane. Left click the Ppoint to re-position the pyramid.
•
Left click on PYRA1 to make it the CE and move the Locator Handle to its origin. The bottom face of the pyramid needs to be aligned with the bottom face of PYRA2.
•
Right click the Z Linear Movement handle and select Move Handle> Align with Feature… from the popup menu. Move the handle to Ppoint 2, i.e. the central bottom face of the pyramid.
•
Right click the Z Linear Movement handle again and select Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. Move the pointer over a bottom edge of PYRA2 to highlight a Through Linear Edge feature and left click to re-position the pyramid
www.aveva.com 170
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Left click on NOZZ TANK2-N2 to make it the CE and move the Locator Handle to its origin. The nozzle needs to be rotated around its flange face so that it faces East, i.e. a 90º rotation.
•
Right click on the Z axis rotation handle and select Enter Value… form the pop-up menu to display the Rotate Selection about Z form. Enter 90 in the textbox and click the Preview button. If the nozzle does not rotate to the correct orientation, enter -90 in the textbox and click the Preview button again. If the nozzle is in the correct orientation, click the OK button.
•
Right click the on any equipment primitive and select Exit Equipment Editor form the pop-up menu.
PUMP1 Corrections
•
Left click on PUMP1 to make it the CE and display the Locator Handle at its origin.
•
Right click on the Z Linear Movement handle and select Move Handle>Snap to Point… from the popup menu. Move the pointer over the face of the suction nozzle of the pump to find the P0 and then left click on it to move the handle.
•
Right click on the Z Linear Movement handle and select Align with Feature… from the pop-up menu. Move the pointer over the flange on the pipe that the suction nozzle is meant to connect to until P1 is identified and the Through normal Ppoint Feature text is displayed. Left click on the feature to reposition the pump
www.aveva.com 171
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Right click on any of pumps primitives and select Edit Equipment from the pop-up menu.
•
Right click on CYLI1 of PUMP1, the drive shaft cylinder, to make it the CE and move the Locator Handle to its origin. Right click on the Y Axis Rotation handle and move the pointer over the inboard dish until P1 is located. Left click the Ppoint to re-orientate the cylinder.
•
Locate DISH2 of PUMP1 and right click on it to make it the CE and move the Locator Handle to its origin.
•
Right click the Z Linear Movement handle and select Snap to Point… from the pop-up menu. Move the pointer over the end of CYLI1 until P2 is located. Left click on the Ppoint to re-position the dish.
•
Right click on any pump primitive and select Exit Equipment Editor from the pop-up menu.
•
Click the Model Editor button on the Model Editor Toolbar to exit Model Editor Mode.
•
The corrections are now complete.
www.aveva.com 172
CHAPTER 9
9
Basic Equipment Modelling
This chapter introduces the modelling of Equipment items in PDMS. Modelling equipment introduces many of the concepts of 3D modelling in PDMS and is, therefore, a good basis for development of PDMS skills.
9.1
The Principles of Modelling Equipment
Equipment (EQUI) items may represent any type of equipment in a Plant. The level of detail of the equipment model depends on the project requirements. Adding more detail takes more time and, therefore, costs more. Generally it is important is that the modelled equipment is a reasonable representation of the actual equipment, is volumetrically and spatially correct and that any nozzles are in the exact position, the correct orientation and have the right specification required.
9.1.1
User Defined Elements Types for Equipment
A UDET may be created, based on a standard element type, which has a more meaningful base name. For example, all types of equipment have the element type EQUI, UDETs enable equipment types to be , say, :PUMP, :REBOILER, :TANK, :FILTER, etc. UDETs are defined in the Lexicon module and generally have the same attributes as the base type, e.g. an EQUI, although some of the attributes may be hidden at the time of creating the UDET. UDETs are distinguished from standard element types by the prefix of a colon, similar to UDAs. They also have an ActType (active type) attribute which is set to the UDET type, e.g. :PUMP. The standard Type attribute is set to the base type, e.g. EQUI. In most respects UDETs may be used in exactly the same way as EQUI elements, however, currently there is no Appware to create the UDET elements, except if an equipment template is used, so they must be created using the Command Window by entering the syntax NEW , e.g. NEW :PUMP.
L
Refer to Chapter 10 for information on using equipment templates.
In Design Explorer the UDET is displayed with an EQUI icon.
L
Once a UDET has been created it’s ActType attribute may be changed by using the Command line syntax CHANGETYPE TO , where is another valid UDET for the Type defined in Lexicon. An EQUI may also be changed to a UDET using the same syntax.
www.aveva.com 173
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.1.2
The Equipment Hierarchy Equipment (EQUI) elements are owned by Zones (ZONE). The EQUI element may own primitives directly. EQUI elements may own one or more optional Sub-equipment (SUBE) elements which own primitives. The SUBE elements are used to break down equipment into sub-parts. The Primitives are the elements that are displayed in the 3D View to represent the EQUI.
9.1.3
Primitives Equipment items consist of a collection of PDMS primitives, arranged in such a way in 3D space that they represent the real life object. When a new piece of equipment is to be built, one of the first decisions to be made is which primitives are going to be used to create the representation required. Generally the ‘internals’ of any equipment are not modelled as it only the external representation that is required. In this simple example of a horizontal vessel, seven primitives are positioned and orientated such that they represent a vessel. There is no ‘connectivity’ between the primitives.
The following primitives are available for equipment modelling in PDMS
Box (BOX)
Cylinder (CYLI)
Cone (CONE)
Snout (SNOU)
Pyramid (PYRA)
Circular Torus (CTOR)
www.aveva.com 174
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Rectangular Torus (RTOR)
Dish (DISH)
Sloped Cylinder (SLCY)
Extrusion (EXTR)
Solid of Revolution (REVO)
Nozzle (NOZZ)
9.1.3.1 Ppoints Each primitive has a set of Ppoints at fixed locations. A Ppoint is a point that has a position and direction attribute as well as other attributes that are used by other modules and applications. Ppoints are numbered with P0 always being at the origin of the primitive. For example a cylinder has three Ppoints: • P0 is in the middle of the cylinder and points along the Z axis of the cylinder. • P1 is in the centre on the top face of the cylinder and points away from the face, i.e. in a +ve Z direction. • P2 is in the centre on the bottom face of the cylinder and points away from the face, i.e. in a -ve Z direction. For equipment modelling, Ppoints are used for locating and aligning primitives. Ppoints are used for other purposes in different modules. Appendix A contains a full list of primitives showing their attributes and Ppoints.
9.1.3.2 Negative Primitives Primitive Type
Element Type
Negative Box
NBOX
Negative Cylinder
NCYL
Negative Cone
NCON
Negative Snout
NSNO
Negative Pyramid
NPYR
Negative Circular Torus
NCTO
Negative Rectangular Torus
NRTO
Negative Dish
NDIS
Negative Sloped Cylinder
NSLC
Negative Extrusion
NXTR
Negative Solid of Revolution
NREV
175
To obtain a desired shape or effect in the model negative primitives may be used to ‘cut’ a solid primitive. Negative primitives are owned by solid primitives and will only negate their owner. The negation is controlled using the Holes Drawn checkbox on the Representation tab of the Graphics Settings form. All solid primitives, except nozzles, have an equivalent negative primitive whose attributes are the same but the names are different. The table gives the element types of available negatives primitives.
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.1.4
Equipment and Primitive Orientation
When considering the modelling of equipment some decisions about orientation have to be made. The first major decision will be to fix equipment North, i.e. where North is in relation to the equipment drawing. When considering this, it is usually best to try and build the equipment in such a way that it does not need to be orientated within the Zone. Primitives like boxes should be built such that their X, Y and Z lengths are aligned with the default axis system and not built in such a way that they need to be rotated from the default axis system. Obviously, some primitives will need to be rotated, but if you try to keep these to a minimum then any subsequent changes to the equipment will be easier.
9.1.5
Equipment, Sub-Equipment and Origin
The position of the equipment origin must also be considered before commencing modelling. The EQUI element’s Position attribute holds the equipment origins position. If SUBE elements are used, their Position attribute defines the SUBE origin position with respect to the equipment origin. A solid primitives Position attribute defines the position of the primitives origin with respect to the SUBE origin, if owned by a SUBE, or the EQUI origin if owned directly owned by the EQUI. All negative primitives Position attributes defines the position of the negative primitives origin with respect to its owning solid primitives origin.
9.1.6
Naming Equipment
Conventionally, equipment items are named using the tag number, e.g. /E1101, /P1001-A, /D2016, etc., however, any name or naming convention may be used. It is not usual to name primitives, except nozzles, unless they need to be identified for some purpose. Nozzles are named and generally prefixed by the equipment name to make them unique, e.g. /E1101N1, /P1001-A/N1, /D2016/1, etc. Naming the nozzles also helps in identification when connecting Pipework to them. Nozzle names will also be referenced on the Piping Isometric. Whatever names are given, the naming convention is usually defined by the project specification. It is possible that the project may have Autonaming rules set up for items such as nozzles so that the project conventions are followed in every detail.
9.2
The Equipment Application
The Equipment application is used for equipment modelling in PDMS. Selecting Design>Equipment… from the main menu loads the Equipment application and changes the main menu bar by adding additional pull-down menus and adds options to some of the standard pull-downs. The Equipment Toolbar is also displayed.
The following sections describe the additions to the main menu bar for the Equipment application.
www.aveva.com 176
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.2.1
The Create Menu
The Create menu has the following options for the Equipment application: • Equipment… - this option displays the Equipment Creation form This form enables the EQUI element to be named, using the Name textbox, and positioned by entering explicit coordinates in the relevant Position textboxes. The defined position is the equipment origin. The position may be given with respect to any other element by entering a valid element in the Wrt text box. The Attributes… button displays an Attributes form where design data may be added for future reporting use. • Sub-Equipment… - this option displays the Create Sub-Equipment form:
This form is similar to the Create Equipment form. Sub-equipments are considered significant elements and should be named. The position may be specified with respect to any element; however, the SUBE origin is with respect to the EQUI origin.
• Primitives… - this option displays the Create Primitive form that enables primitives to be created. All primitives, except nozzles, are displayed with a shape button and a link label. Clicking either one displays a form with the appropriate attributes for the selected primitive. The parameters, display levels and obstruction values may be set. The Parameters… button displays a picture of the primitive in a separate window that shows the parameters and the default orientation of the primitive. The Create button creates the primitive and displays a modification form that enables the primitive to be positioned, rotated and aligned. The Back button returns the user to the previous form.
www.aveva.com
177
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The sub-forms for the Create button are described in the worked example later in this chapter. The Switch to Negative Primitives button displays the Create Negative Primitive form which enables the creation of negative primitives that are used to negate positive primitives to obtain desired shapes. The form is similar to the solid primitives form except the buttons and link labels create negative primitives. Clicking either one displays a form with the appropriate attributes for the selected negative primitive. The parameters, display levels and obstruction values may be set. The Parameters… button displays a picture of the primitive in a separate window that shows the parameters and the default orientation of the primitive. The Create button creates the primitive and displays a modification form that enables the primitive to be positioned, rotated and aligned. The Back button returns the user to the previous form. The sub-forms for the Create button are described in the worked example later in this chapter. The Switch to Normal Primitives button returns to the Create Primitive form, from where new solid primitives may be created. •
Nozzles… - this option displays the Create Nozzle form: This form enables a nozzle to be named and specified before creating the element. The Nozzle Type… button displays the Nozzle Specification form that enables the Specification and Nominal Bore to be selected. Clicking the Apply button on this form will display the selections on the Create Nozzle form.
www.aveva.com 178
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The Height text box specifies the length of the nozzle (P1 to P2). The Attributes… button displays the Nozzle Attributes form which enables general data and Design data to be entered for later use, e.g. reporting, etc. The Position area of the form enables the location of the nozzle origin (P1) to be specified and the Orientate P1 is textbox enables a direction for P1 of the nozzle, and hence the whole nozzle, to be set. • Standard Equipment… - this option displays the Create Equipment form where standard equipment may be created by making a series of selections based on equipment templates. Refer to Chapter 10 Equipment Modelling Using Templates for details of this form and its use. • Electrical Component… - this option displays the Create Electrical Component form from which electrical components may be created using selection tables. Refer to Chapter 10 Equipment Modelling Using Templates for details of this form and its use. • Points… – this option displays the Design Points form that enables the creation of Design Points for equipment items. Design Points on equipment are used for Equipment Associations which are outside the scope of this training module.
L
Equipment Associations form part of the TM-1200 Equipment Design (Advanced) training module.
• Copy mechanical equipment model… - this option uses the Mechanical Equipment Interface and is outside the scope of this training guide.
www.aveva.com 179
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.2.2
The Modify Menu
The Modify menu has the following options for the Equipment application: • Properties… - this option displays the Modify Properties form, if the item has properties that can be modified. Refer to Chapter 10 Equipment Modelling Using Templates for details of this form and its use. • Re-evaluate Rules – this option re-evaluates template rules. • Unlink from Original – this option unlinks an instance of a template from its original definition.
L
The two options above are used with templates, which is outside the scope of this training module. Equipment templates form part of the TM-1200 Equipment Design (Advanced) training module.
• Representation… this option displays the Modify Representation form that enables the display levels and the obstruction values to be set for primitives. Refer to Training Guide TM-1003 Design Utilities for details of Clash Detection.
• Stretch/Trim – this option enables a primitive to be stretched (lengthened) or trimmed (shortened) by moving one, or more of the primitives Ppoints. The Ppoints must be on the ‘end(s)’ of the primitive. The sub-menu contains a variety of stretch/trim options:
All Sides… - this option displays the Stretch/Trim All Sides form: The form displays the primitive Type. The CE button makes the CE the subject of the operation and updates the primitive Type if necessary. Entering a Value in the text box and clicking the Apply button will stretch all external Ppoints by the entered amount.
L
A +ve value will stretch the primitive and a –ve value will trim the primitive.
ID P-Point… - this option displays the Stretch/Trim P-Point form:
www.aveva.com 180
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The form displays the primitive Type. The CE button makes the CE the subject of the operation and updates the primitive Type if necessary. Entering a Value in the text box and clicking the Apply button prompts for the identification of a Ppoint on the primitive. The identified Ppoint is stretched/trimmed by the entered amount.
L
A +ve value will stretch the primitive and a –ve value will trim the primitive.
To P-Point - this option enables a selected Ppoint on a primitive to be stretched or trimmed to the appropriate co-ordinate of a Ppoint on another Design element. The user is first prompted to select the Ppoint to be moved from the CE and, when selected, prompted to select the Ppoint to stretch/trim to. The first Ppoint will be stretched/trimmed to the plane of the second Ppoint. To Pline – this option enables a selected Ppoint on a primitive to be stretched or trimmed to the appropriate co-ordinate of a Pline on a SCTN or GENSEC element. The user is first prompted to select the Ppoint to be moved from the CE and, when selected, prompted to select the Pline to stretch/trim to. The selected Ppoint will be stretched/trimmed to the plane of the Pline. Clearance to P-Point… - this option displays the Stretch/Trim Clearance to P-Point form:
The form displays the primitive Type. The CE button makes the CE the subject of the operation and updates the primitive Type if necessary.
Entering a Value in the text box and clicking the Apply button first prompts the user to select the Ppoint to be moved on the CE and, when selected, prompts for the identification of a Ppoint to stretch/trim to.. The first Ppoint is stretched/trimmed to a plane the specified distance from the second Ppoint.
L
A +ve or –ve value determine which side of the target Ppoint the first Ppoint will be moved to.
Clearance to Pline – this option displays the Stretch/Trim Clearance to Pline form. The form displays the primitive Type. The CE button makes the CE the subject of the operation and updates the primitive Type, if necessary. Entering a Value in the text box and clicking the Apply button first prompts the user to select the Ppoint to be moved on the CE and, when selected, prompts for the identification of a Pline to stretch/trim to. The Ppoint is stretched/trimmed to a plane the specified distance from the selected Pline.
L
A +ve or –ve value determine which side of the target Pline the first Ppoint will be moved to.
For all of the above options, a confirmation message is displayed if the stretch/trim is successful.
L If two end p-points on the same primitive are selected, the distance between the two points will become zero. The stretch/trim options cannot be used to invert a primitive. www.aveva.com 181
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
•
Slide – this option enables a primitive to be moved (slide) by using one of its Ppoints. The sub-menu has two options:
To P-Point – this option first prompts the user to select a Ppoint on the primitive and, once selected, prompts for a second Ppoint, on another Design element, to be identified. The primitive is moved in the direction of the first Ppoint to the plane of the second Ppoint. To Pline – this option first prompts the user to select a Ppoint on the primitive and, once selected, prompts for the selection of a Pline on a SCTN or GENSEC. The primitive is moved in the direction of the first Ppoint to the plane of the Pline. •
Equipment Specification… - this option displays the Modify Equipment Specification form.
This form is only displayed if the equipment is a template that has editable properties; otherwise an error message is displayed.
•
Nozzle Specification… - this option displays the Nozzle Specification form:
This is the same form as displayed when creating a nozzle. The form enables the Specification and Nominal Bore to be modified.
•
Equipment Origin – this option enables the equipment origin to be re-positioned. This option has a sub-menu with the following options: ID Point – this option prompts the user to select a Ppoint on one of the primitives of the current EQUI to move the equipment origin to. Explicit… – this option displays the Modify Origin By form: The equipment origin may be moved from its current position by entering values in one or more of the direction text boxes. Clicking the Apply button moves the origin by the specified amounts in the specified direction(s). If the form is re-opened the text boxes will display 0 again. This is because the origin is being moved relatively from its current position.
L
It is usual to keep the equipment origin within the bounds of the equipment.
www.aveva.com 182
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
For either of the above options, after moving the origin a confirmation message is displayed. Clicking the Yes button returns the origin to its previous position and clicking the No button retains its new position.
L •
Moving the equipment origin does not move any SUBE elements or primitives owned by the EQUI. Their position attributes are updated to reflect their position with respect to the new origin.
Sub-Equipment Origin – this option enables a sub-equipment origin to be re-positioned. This option has a sub-menu with the same options as the Equipment Origin option described above. The sub-menu options function in exactly the same way as previously described.
• Primitives… – this option displays the Primitives form. The form is the same as one of the sub-forms from the primitive creation process and enables the primitive to be re-sized, re-positioned and reorientated. • Points… - this option displays the Design Points form where new Design Points may be created or previously defined Design Points modified. These Ppoints are generally used for Equipment Associations which is outside the scope of this training guide. Refer to TM-1200 Equipment Design (Advanced). • Penetration Profile…- this option enables the identification of a extrusion primitive in the equipment to be the profile for a managed penetration hole. Hole Management for Equipment is outside the scope of this training guide. Refer to TM-1200 Equipment Design (Advanced).
www.aveva.com 183
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.2.3
The Position Menu The Position menu has one specific option for the Equipment application: Refer to section 6.2 for information on positioning elements explicitly and relatively. • Equipment Point – this option enables an equipment element to be positioned by re-positioning one of its primitives. The options on the sub-menu all prompt for the identification of a Ppoint on one of the equipment primitives. Having selected a Ppoint different forms are displayed to facilitate the re-positioning depending on the sub-menu option selected. The sub-menu options are:
At Explicit… - displays a Position form: The identified point is displayed at the top of the form. The current position is displayed in the coordinate textboxes. The new explicit position may be entered into the East/West, North/South and Up/Down textboxes. Clicking the Apply button re-positions the equipment point to the specified position. Select a new CE in Designer Explorer and clicking the CE button on the form enables another element to be re-positioned. The Reset button resets the element to its previous position. At General… - displays a Position form: The identified point is displayed at the top of the form. The At options list has the following choices, selecting the required option and then clicking the Apply button executes the option o Cursor – requires two ‘free space’ cursor picks in different orthogonal views. The view direction automatically changes for the second pick and then returns to the original view. The equipment point is moved to a point derived from the two picks. o
ID Cursor – requires a primitive to be picked with the cursor. The equipment point is repositioned at the origin (P0) of the picked primitive.
o
ID P-Point – requires a Ppoint to be picked. The equipment point is re-positioned at the picked Ppoint.
o
Name… - displays a Name form where any valid element name may be entered. The equipment point is moved to the origin of the named element.
o
Pin… - displays the Pin Number form where a valid Pin No. may be selected. The equipment point is re-positioned at the selected Pin.
www.aveva.com 184
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Selecting a new CE in Designer Explorer and clicking the CE button on the form enables another element to be re-positioned. The Reset button resets the element to its previous position. Through – displays a Move form: The identified point is displayed at the top of the form. The direction that equipment is to move in is entered in the Direction textbox. The Through options list has the following choices, select the choice and then click the Apply button.
o
Cursor – requires a ‘free space’ cursor pick. The equipment point is moved in the given direction until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the reference point.
o
ID Cursor – requires a primitive to be picked with cursor. The equipment point is moved in the given direction until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the origin of the picked primitive.
o
ID Ppoint – requires a Ppoint to be picked. The equipment point is moved in the given direction until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the picked Ppoint.
o
Name - displays a Name form where any valid element name may be entered. The equipment point is moved in the given direction until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the origin of the named element.
o
Coordinate – displays the Coordinate form: A direction may be selected from the options list and a value entered in the textbox to specify a plane. The equipment point is moved in the given direction (on the Move form) until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the specified plane.
o
Pin - displays the Pin Number form where a valid Pin No. may be selected. The equipment point is moved in the given direction until it lies on a line perpendicular to the direction of movement through the selected Pin.
www.aveva.com 185
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Clearance – displays a Move form: The identified point is displayed at the top of the form. The direction that equipment is to move in is entered in the Direction textbox. The required clearance value is entered in the Clearance textbox. The Infront options list contains a number of positional options, Infront/Behind/Onto/Under/From/To to qualify the clearance. The Cursor options list has the same options a described above for the Through option, and can be summarised as follows: If a reference point is specified using the Cursor, ID Ppoint, Coordinate or Pin options, the equipment point moves in the given direction until it is the given clearance from the reference point. If a reference element is specified using the ID Cursor or Name options, the equipment point moves in the given direction and is given the clearance Infront of, Behind, Under, Ontop of or From the surface of the reference element. To use Infront of or Behind there must be a plan component of the direction; to use Under or Onto there must be an elevation component of the direction. For example, trying to move an element E30S Under the reference element will give an error message. The direction does not need to intersect the reference element. Towards – displays a Move form: The identified point is displayed at the top of the form. The distance the equipment is to move is specified in the Distance textbox. The direction that equipment is to move in is determined by selection made from the Towards options list. The Towards options are:
o
Cursor - this option can only be used in an orthogonal view. Use the cursor to define the point to move towards. The equipment point moves the given distance towards the reference point.
o
ID Cursor - Use the cursor to pick a primitive to move towards. The equipment point moves the given distance towards the origin of the reference element.
o
ID P-point - Use the cursor to pick a Ppoint to move towards. The equipment point moves the given distance towards the reference point.
o
Name – displays a Name form where any valid element name can be entered. The equipment point moves the given distance towards the reference point.
o
Pin – displays the Pin Number form where a valid Pin No. may be selected. The equipment point moves the given distance towards the reference point.
www.aveva.com
186
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.2.4
The Orientate Menu The Orientate menu has one specific option for the Equipment application: Refer to section 6.3 for information on orientation using axes and rotate. • Primitive>Point… – this sub-menu option enables a selected Ppoint on a primitive, thus re-orientating the whole primitive. Selecting the option displays the Point Orientation form. The Point option list displays all of the primitives Ppoints and, therefore, varies depending on the primitive selected. The primitive name is also displayed. When the form is opened an axes aid, showing the cardinal directions, is displayed on the default Ppoint. If a different point is selected the aid moves to that point
The text box enables any valid direction to be entered for the selected Ppoint. Clicking the Apply button will re-orientate the primitive using the primitive’s origin as the rotation point, i.e. the position of the primitive is not modified. The Reset button resets the primitive to its previous orientation.
9.2.5
The Connect Menu
The Connect menu ‘connects’ one primitive to another by making a Ppoint on one primitive co-incident with a Ppoint on another primitive. This process re-positions and re-orientates the first primitive, the new orientation being the direction of the Ppoint on the second primitive.
L
There is no actual connectivity between primitives. The Connect menu has one specific option for the Equipment application: The Primitive option has a sub-menu with the following options:
• ID Point – to use this option the primitive to be ‘connected’ must be the CE. The option prompts for the graphical selection of a Ppoint on the CE and, once selected, prompts for the graphical selection of a Ppoint on the target primitive. • Explicit… - to use this option the primitive to be ‘connected’ must be the CE. The option prompts for the item to be connected to and, once selected, displays the Explicit P-Point Connection form: The Connect Point and To Point option lists contain all Ppoints for the type of primitives used in the ‘connection’. Having selected the required points, clicking the Apply button moves and re-orientates the CE such that the two selected points are co-incident.
www.aveva.com 187
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.2.6
The Equipment Toolbar
The Equipment Toolbar contains buttons that are shortcuts to commands available from the pull-down menu system. The toolbar also contains an option list that enables the navigation level to be set. The shortcut buttons are: Create Standard Equipment - this button displays the Create Equipment form that enables equipment to be modelled from pre-defined templates. The command is also available by selecting Create>Standard Equipment… from the main menu. Refer to Chapter 10, Equipment Modelling Using Templates, for details of this form. Modify Properties – this button modifies the properties of the CE, if it has editable properties. This option is intended for use with parametric equipment templates. The command is also available by selecting Modify>Properties… from the main menu. Modify Position – this button displays the Explicit Position form which is also available by selecting Position>Explicit… from the main menu. Modify Orientation – this option displays the Rotate form which is also available by selecting Orientate>Rotate… from the main menu. The Navigation Level options list sets the significant element level to be used when navigating in the hierarchy using graphical picking. For this functionality to work, the Navigate to Element function must be on. Refer to section 5.3 for details of the Navigate to Element function. There are three options available from the list: • Equipment – selecting an equipment item with the navigation level set to Equipment sets the CE the EQUI element. • Sub Equipment – selecting an equipment item with the navigation level set to Sub Equipment sets the CE to the SUBE. If the EQUI does not own a SUBE or owns more than one SUBE, the CE is set to the EQUI. • Element - selecting an equipment item with the navigation level set to Element sets the CE to the primitive under the cursor.
www.aveva.com 188
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.3
Creating Equipment – A Worked Example
This worked example builds a piece of process equipment, the Stabilizer Reboiler tagged E1301, from the AVEVA Plant Stabilizer training project. By the end of this training course, all equipment from this project will have been built. Select Utilities>Training Setup… from the main menu to display the Training Setup form. Select the Foundations tab if not the current tab.
Click the Delete TRA and MESS Sites radio button and check the Setup Equipment Modelling checkbox. Click the Apply button. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form. The SITE TRA.SITE.MESS and the Stabilizer equipment in ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 have now been deleted from the database.
www.aveva.com 189
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The equipment locations for the project are shown on the following Equipment Location drawing:
www.aveva.com 190
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.3.1
Information and Decisions
The Equipment General Arrangement for Reboiler E1301 is shown below:
Before starting to model E1301, or any equipment item, key decisions need to be made: 1. The location of the equipment origin. The equipment origin can be placed anywhere. It could be placed on the bottom of one of the saddles so that it may be located on a foundation, however, looking at the location information on the Equipment Location drawing, it would be easier to place the origin on the centreline of the vessel in line with nozzles NS1 and NS2. This would give an equipment origin position of W 319150 N 296950 U 101470. 2. The orientation of the equipment. There is little point in modelling the equipment in one orientation and then re-orientating it when complete. From the Equipment Arrangement drawing it can be seen that E1301 has its flanged end to the South and its dished end to the North, so this is the orientation that will be used for the primitives. The equipment will use the default orientation of Y is N and Z is Up. 3. The primitives to be used. Looking at the Equipment GA for E1301 it may be broken down to the following primitives: • • • •
6 x Cylinders 2 x Boxes 5 x Nozzles 1 x Dish
Total 14 Primitives
www.aveva.com 191
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.3.2
Creating the EQUI Element
Make ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01 the CE and select Create>Equipment… from the main menu to display the Create Equipment form: In the Name text box enter E1301 and press the Return key. Change the East/West option list to West and enter the value 319150 into the textbox and press the Return key. Enter 296950 in the North text box and 101470 in the Up textbox.
L
Note that the Wrt text box is set to the equipments owner, the element ZONE-EQUIPMENT-AREA01.
Click the OK button to create the equipment element with the specified name and at the specified coordinates.
At this time nothing is displayed in the 3D View as the equipment does not own any primitives. Check the Position and Orientation attributes by selecting Query>Attributes… from the main menu to display the Attributes form: Note that the X qualifier is shown as -319150, i.e. a Westing. The Orientation is the default orientation, i.e. Y is N and Z is Up (X is East), as the Create Equipment form does not allow an orientation to be specified. As this is the required orientation, the equipment does not need to be re-orientated.
www.aveva.com 192
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.3.3
Creating the Primitives
Although it is not important in which order the primitives are built, it makes sense to model the main ‘body’ of the Reboiler first, i.e. the longest cylinder. From this base most of the other primitives can be positioned. From the Equipment GA drawing the length of this cylinder can be derived as 6590 – 60 – 60 = 6470. The origin of the cylinder is at its centre, i.e. 6470 ÷ 2 = 3235 from the end. The southern end of the cylinder is 290 – 60 = 230 South of the equipment origin, therefore, the centre of the cylinder is 3235 – 230 = 3005 North of the equipment origin. Select Create>Primitives… from the main menu to display the Primitives form. Click the Cylinder button or link label to display the cylinder creation form.
Enter 6470 in the Height textbox and press the Return key. Enter 835 in the Diameter textbox and press the Return key. Select Default in the Used for options list. This sets the Level attribute to 0 10 and the Obstruction value to Hard (2). Click the Create button
The cylinder is created and the form changes to the Modify Primitives form, which is similar to the Create Primitive form but with the addition of fold-up panels to facilitate position, rotation and alignment options for the primitive to be set. The Position fold-up panel is open by default. To position the cylinder the Datum must be set. As the position of the cylinder, with respect to the equipment origin, has been calculated using its origin, the Datum may be left at Origin (the default). Enter 3005 in the North text box and press the Return key.
L
Note that the cylinder moves as soon as the key is pressed. The East/West and Up/Down co-ordinates remain a 0. Click the Walk to Drawlist view control button to fully display the cylinder. The cylinder is in the correct position, however, it is in its default orientation, i.e. Y is N and Z is Up:
www.aveva.com 193
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
To place the cylinder in the correct orientation it must be rotated around the X axis by 90º so that its orientation is Y is D and Z is N. Close the Position fold-up panel and open the Rotate fold-up panel.
Enter -90 in the Angle textbox and select About X from the Direction option list. Click the Apply Rotation button and the cylinder rotates by -90º around the X axis to give it the correct orientation. Click the Next button on the form to return to the main Create Primitive form.
The next primitive to be created is the flange on the southern end of the equipment. On the Create Primitive form click Cylinder again to display the cylinder creation form. From the Equipment GA drawing, the thickness of the flange is 60mm and the diameter is 960mm. Enter 60 in the Height textbox and 960 in the Diameter textbox, not forgetting to press the Return key after each entry. Click the Create button to create the cylinder and change the form to the Modify Primitive form.
The flange cylinder has been created with its origin, i.e. P0, at the equipment origin location and in the default orientation. The flange cylinder could be positioned and orientated as the first cylinder, however, it may also be positioned and orientated using the Align with P-Point function. From the Datum options list select P-point 1. This is the P-point that will be aligned with a P-point on the first cylinder, placing the flange cylinder in the correct location and orientation. Close the Position fold-up panel and open the Align with P-Point fold-up panel.
Click the Pick P-point button.
www.aveva.com 194
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The prompt Pick P-point to align with: is displayed in the prompt area. Click and hold then left mouse button on the end of the first cylinder. The P-point at the end of this cylinder will be displayed as a small dot. Pass the cursor over the dot and the cursor will change shape and the name of the P-point under the cursor is displayed in the prompt area. Release the left mouse button and the flange cylinder will re-position and re-orientate such that its P1 is aligned with the P2 of the first cylinder. Click the Next button on the form to return to the create Primitives form. To check the position of the flange cylinder select Query>Attributes… from the main menu. The Position attribute, i.e. of the cylinders origin, should be X 0 Y -260 Z 0. The Select Datum P-Point button may also be used to select the datum P-point on the primitive to be moved.
9.3.3.1 Using Copy Offset The next primitive to create is the second flange, just North of the equipment origin. This primitive could be created, positioned and orientated as described previously; however, it may also be created by copying the first flange cylinder and offsetting it. With the flange cylinder as the CE, selecting Create>Copy Offset… from the main menu displays the Copy with Offset form. The Object options list has three choices: • CE – this option enables a new CE to be selected. • List – this option uses the elements in the current list. • Pick – when the Apply button is clicked, elements may be picked from the graphical view. Press the Esc key to end selection. The to options list enables the destination of the copies to be specified and has the following options: • CE – navigating to another valid owner in the Designer explorer and then selecting this option creates the copies under that element. • Rel. – (meaning Relative) this option creates the copies with the same owner as the element(s) being copied. The number of copies required is entered in the Number of Copies textbox. If more than one copy is specified each copy will be offset from the previous by the values in the X, Y and Z textboxes. As these cannot be changed negative values must be entered if a –X (West), -Y (South) or –Z (Down) direction is required. The axis system to be used may be specified in the Axes textbox. World is the default.
195
www.aveva.com
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
To specify the offsets as being the same as those between two existing design items, use the Offset menu options to measure the required distances. The sub-menus are used to specify the type of element to be measured from and the type of element to be measured to. The choices in each case are: • Element - defined as the origin of an element • Design Point - a Ppoint or construction pin • Pline - a Pline of a structural section • Edge - a panel edge linking two vertices. The required options are selected from the menu and, when prompted, two points are picked between which the offset is to be measured. The calculated distances are entered in the Offset X, Y and Z textboxes automatically. When the element to be copied has been selected an axes aid is shown at the origin of the element, showing the directions of the selected axis system. For the new flange, the first flange cylinder needs to be copied 290 + 350 = 640 North wrt World. Select Rel. from the to options list, enter 1 in the Number of Copies textbox and 640 in the Y textbox. Leave the axes as World. Clicking the Apply button copies the cylinder and moves it 640 North. A confirmation message is displayed.
Click the Yes button retains the copies. Clicking the No button rejects the copies.
Do not dismiss the Copy with Offset form. The third flange at the North end of the equipment is the same diameter and thickness as the other two flanges so it can be created by copying the second flange. Select CE from the Object options list to make the second flange the CE (note that the axes aid moves) and click the Apply button on the Copy with Offset form again to copy the second flange and move it North by 640. Click the Yes button on the confirmation form to keep the copy and then click the Dismiss button on the Copy with Offset form. The flange now needs to be positioned at the North end of the ‘body’ cylinder. Check that the third flange is the CE and select Connect>Primitive>ID Point from the main menu. The prompt Pick on a point on the current item is displayed in the secondary prompt area.
www.aveva.com 196
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Click and hold the left mouse button on the third flange and note the three Ppoint ‘dots’ displayed on the element. Move the cursor over the southern most dot until the cursor changes shape and release the mouse button. The prompt in the secondary prompt area changes to Pick the point to connect to.
Move the cursor to the North end of the ‘body’ cylinder and click and hold the left mouse button on the cylinder. A single Ppoint ‘dot’ is displayed in the centre of the end of the cylinder. Move the cursor over this Ppoint until the cursor changes shape and then release the left mouse button. The flange cylinder moves to the end of the ‘body’ cylinder and a confirmation message is displayed. Click the No button to retain the flange cylinder in its new position. Save Work.
9.3.3.2 Graphical Manipulation of Primitives The next primitive required for the Reboiler is the cylinder at the dished (North) end. This cylinder will be positioned and orientated using the Model Editor. From the Equipment GA, this cylinder is 500- 200 = 300 long with a diameter of 910. If the create Primitives form is not already displayed, select Create>Primitives… from the main menu. Click the Cylinder link label to display the create Cylinder form. Enter 300 in the Height textbox and 910 in the Diameter textbox. Select Default from the Used for options list and then click the Create button to create the cylinder at the equipment origin. Click the Next button on the Primitives form to return to the create Primitives form. Enter Model Editor mode by selecting the Model Editor button on the Model Editor Toolbar or selecting Edit>Model Editor from the main menu. Right click anywhere on the E1301 model. The Locator Handle is displayed at the equipment origin together with a pop-up menu. Select Edit Members of Equipment from the pop-up menu. This enables the Graphical Equipment Modification (GEM) facilities of Model Editor Mode.
L 197
Note that the Locator Handle is no longer displayed. www.aveva.com
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Left click on the newly created cylinder. This highlights the primitive in the CE colour and displays the Locator Handle at the cylinders origin. Move the cursor over the X Axis rotation handle and then left click and hold down the left mouse button. Rotate the cylinder by moving the cursor, taking note of the direction and angle feedback as the cylinder rotates. When the angle feedback reads -90 (and the direction feedback reads N), release the left mouse button to re-orientate the cylinder.
Move the cursor over the Z Axis linear movement handle, click and hold the left mouse button and drag the cylinder in along the Z Axis until it is clear of the North end flange.
Toggle feature highlighting on by selecting Selection>Feature Highlighting form the main menu, making sure the adjacent checkbox is displayed, or by pressing the F key. Right click on the Locator Handle to display the pop-up menu and then select Move Handle>Snap to Point from the sub-menu. Move the cursor over the cylinder until it is over P2 of the cylinder and left click to relocate the handle on the Ppoint, i.e. at the southern end of the cylinder
www.aveva.com 198
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Rotate the view to see the north face of the flange cylinder. Move the cursor over the Z Axis linear movement handle. Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the handle South until P1 of the flange cylinder is displayed together with the Through Ppoint Feature feedback. Right click anywhere on the cylinder to display a popup menu and select Exit Equipment Editor to revert back to Model Editor mode. Exit Model Editor mode by clicking the Model Editor button again.
The dish on the North end of the equipment is the next primitive to be created. From the Equipment GA the dish is 200 high with a diameter of 910. A DISH has a Radius attribute which is the knuckle radius to create the representation of a toroidspherical dished end. The knuckle radius is not specified on the drawing so a value of 75 will be used. On the create Primitives form, click the Dish link label to display the dish Primitives form. Enter 910 in the Diameter textbox, 75 in the Radius textbox and 200 in the Height textbox.
Click the Create button to create the dish at the equipment origin.
www.aveva.com 199
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Rotate the dish around the X Axis by -90º so that the flat side of the dish is pointing South, using the Rotate fold-up panel on the Primitives form.
Select Ppoint 2 from the Datum options list to set the datum on the flat side of the dish. Position the dish on the end of the northernmost cylinder using the Align with P-Point fold-up panel.
The two supports for the Reboiler are modelled as BOX primitives. From the Equipment GA the supports are 200mm wide x 460mm long and the bottoms of the supports are 630mm below the centreline of the equipment. A box primitive has Xlength, Ylength and Zlength attributes that reflect its own axis system, i.e. Xlength is along the box’s East direction, Ylength is along the box’s North direction and Zlength is along the Up direction. The box attributes should be orientated such that the attributes follow the owning frame of reference. Therefore, the attributes for the boxes will be Xlength = 460 and Ylength = 200. The Zlength depends on the height of the boxes. It is usual, in these circumstances, to model the supports from the centreline of the equipment, therefore, Zlength = 630.
On the create Primitives form, click the Box link label to display the BOX Primitives form. Enter 460 in the X Length textbox, 200 in the Y Length textbox and 630 in the Z Length textbox.
Click the Create button to create the box at the equipment origin.
The box can now be positioned using the Position fold-up panel. From the Equipment GA, the first support is 1420mm North of the equipment origin and on the centreline of the equipmentwww.aveva.com in an East/West 200
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
direction. As the origin of the box is at its centre the primitive need to be positioned 630 ÷ 2 = 315 below the centreline.
On the Position fold up panel, ensure the Datum is set to Origin and enter 1420 in the North textbox. Select Down form the Up/Down options list and enter 315 in the textbox. Click the Next button to return to the create Primitives form. The support box can now be copied to create the second support. From the Equipment GA, the second support is 3660mm North of the first support. With the box as the CE, select Create>Copy Offset… from the main menu. Select Rel. from the to options list, enter 1 in the Number of Copies and 3660 in the Y offset textbox. Click the Apply button to create the copy and click the Yes button on the confirmation message.
9.3.3.3 Creating the Nozzles The Nozzle Schedule on the Equipment GA shows that Reboiler E1301 has five nozzles named NS1, NS2, N1, N2 and N3. For this example the nozzles will be prefixed using the equipment name and a forward slash, e.g. E1301/NS1. Although nozzles are primitives, they do not appear in the create Primitives form but are accessed separately by selecting Create>Nozzles… from the main menu.
A nozzle primitive has its origin, Ppoint P0, at the face of the nozzle flange and is co-incident with the Ppoint P1. Ppoint P2 is at the bottom of the ‘stem’ of the nozzle and the Height attribute is the distance between P1 and P2. When a nozzle is positioned it is the origin position (P0) that is specified. A nozzle orientation may be specified by setting the direction of P1 or the origin may be rotated around another axis. As with the box primitives for the supports, it is customary to model the nozzle ‘stem’ back to the centreline of the vessel.
The first nozzle to be created will be NS2. The Equipment GA shows that the nozzle is located at the equipment origin in both the North/South direction and the East/West direction and its face of flange is www.aveva.com 635mm above the equipment centreline. 201
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Select Create>Nozzles… from the main menu to display the Create Nozzle form. Enter E1301/NS2 in the Name textbox and press the Return key to add the /. Enter: • 635 in the Height textbox • 0 in the East textbox • 0 in the North textbox • 635 in the Up textbox • U in the Orientate P1 is text box Click the Nozzle Type… button to display the Nozzle Specification form. As no nozzle has been created yet the Not at a Nozzle Element message is displayed at the top of the form. The entries in the Specification options list depend on the nozzle specifications in the catalogue as do the entries in the Nominal Bore options list. The SpecRef textbox shows the coded Specification Reference. Select ANSI-NOZZLES from the Specification options list, 150lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list and 100 from the Nominal Bore options list. Click the Apply button to populate the information on the Create Nozzle form. Click the Dismiss button to remove the Nozzle Specification form. Click the Attributes… button on the Create Nozzle form displays the Nozzle Attributes form. Process data may be added to this form using the appropriate text boxes. Clicking the Apply button would set the appropriate nozzle primitive attributes. As no data is given on the Equipment GA these attributes will be left unset. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form.
Click the Apply button on the Create Nozzle form to create the NS2 nozzle at the correct position and orientation and then click the Dismiss button to remove the form.
www.aveva.com 202
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
9.3.3.4 Using Copy Rotate Nozzle NS1 has the same specification and nominal bore as NS2 and is in the same location in the East/West and North/South axes, i.e. at the equipment origin. NS1, therefore, may be created by copying and rotating NS2. With nozzle NS2 as the CE, select Create>Copy Rotate… from the main menu to display the Copy and Rotate form. The form is similar to the Rotate form, with the addition of an Offset option and an Offset form menu which has the same functionality as the Copy with Offset form detailed earlier in this section, i.e. it enables an offset to be added to each element as they are copied. Select Rel. in the to options list. Enter 1 in the Number of Copies textbox and 180 in the Angle (º) textbox. As this copy rotate operation does not require an offset, leave the Offset values as 0. Enter owner in the wrt textbox and press the Return key to change the entry from World to /E1301. Select Cursor>Element from the form menu and pick the southernmost flange cylinder to set the rotation axis at the origin of the cylinder. The rotation axis direction is automatically set to N and its position as East 0, South 260 and Up 0 wrt /E1301. Click the Apply button to copy and rotate the nozzle. Click the Yes button on the confirmation message. Click the Dismiss button on the Copy and Rotate form.
The nozzle appears in Design Explorer as NOZZ 2, i.e. a system name, as the Copy and Rotate form did not offer an option to rename the copy elements. Either select Modify>Name… from the main menu or right click the element in Design Explorer and select Rename… from the pop-up menu to display the Name form. Enter E1301/NS1 in the Name textbox on the form and click the Apply button to rename the nozzle. Click the Dismiss button on the Name form.
www.aveva.com 203
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
From the Equipment GA, nozzle N2 is a 200 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle positioned 350 + 460 = 810mm North of nozzle NS2. Make NS2 the CE and select Create>Copy Offset… from the main menu. Select Rel. from the to options list. Enter 1 in the Number of Copies textbox and 810 in the Y textbox. Click the Apply button to copy the nozzle and then click the Yes button on the confirmation message. Click the Dismiss button on the Copy with Offset form. Rename the nozzle to /E1301/N2. With nozzle N2 as the CE, select Modify>Nozzle Specification… from the main menu to display the Nozzle Specification form. Select 300lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list and select 200 from the Nominal Bore options list. Click the Apply button followed by the Dismiss button.
Nozzle /E1301/N2 has now been re-named and re-sized.
From the Equipment GA, nozzle N1 is 2440mm North of nozzle N2 and rotated by 180º and has the same specification and nominal bore, i.e. #300 RF 200NB.
www.aveva.com 204
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
With nozzle N2 as the CE, select Create>Copy Rotate… from the menu to display the Copy and Rotate form again. The form is still populated with the settings used previously except that the CE has changed to /E1301/N2. Enter 2440 in the Offset Y axis textbox and click the Apply button to copy, rotate and offset nozzle N2.
Click the Dismiss button on the form. Re-name the new nozzle to /E1301/N1.
From the Equipment GA, the final nozzle, N3, is 2440 + 2440 = 4880mm North of nozzle N2 and is the same specification and nominal bore, i.e. #300 RF 200NB. With nozzle N2 as the CE, select Create>Copy Offset… from the menu to display the Copy with Offset form again. The form is still populated with the settings used previously except that the CE has changed to /E1301-N2. Enter 4880 in the Y axis textbox and click the Apply button to copy and offset nozzle N2. Click the Yes button on the confirmation message. Click the Dismiss button on the form. Re-name the new nozzle to /E1301/N3
9.3.3.5 Creating the Tube-Pull Obstruction Volume The Equipment GA shows a tube-pull area for the equipment which must be free of obstructions so that the tube bundle maybe withdrawn from the Reboiler. This kind of volume may be represented by a primitive, however, it would not normally be required to be displayed, but must be modelled for clash detection purposes. These kinds of primitives are called obstruction volumes and are placed on the obstruction display levels, 9 10 by default. This type of volume may be used for such things as escape routes, walkways, valve access, maintenance access, lifting access, etc. From the Equipment GA the tube-pull volume must be 6500 long. Although no diameter is given, making it the OD of the main vessel, i.e. 835, will adequately cover the tube bundle.
www.aveva.com 205
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
With the EQUI element /E1301 as the CE, select Create>Primitives… from the main menu to display the Create Primitive form. Click the Cylinder button or link label to display the create Cylinder form. Enter 6500 in the Height textbox and press the Return key. Enter 835 in the Diameter textbox and press the Return key. For now, leave Used for, Levels and Obstruction pull downs at the default settings. Click the Create button to display the Modify Cylinder form:
Open the Rotate fold-up panel, enter a value of 90 in the Angle textbox, select About X from the Direction pull-down and click the Apply Rotation button to align the new cylinder with the rest of the equipment. Close the Rotate fold-up panel.
The cylinder has been placed, by default at the origin of the equipment. The position of the obstruction volume should be (6500 ÷ 2) + 290 = 3540 South of the equipment origin. Open the Position fold-up panel. Leave the Datum pull-down at Origin. Change the North/South pull-down to South and enter a value of 3540 in the adjacent textbox. Finally, select Reserved Volume from the Used for options list. The Levels values automatically change to 8 and 10 and the Obstruction will change to Soft. The tube-pull obstruction volume is no longer displayed in the 3D View. Click the Next button and dismiss the Create Primitives form. The tube pull cylinder should be named to distinguish it from the other primitives. With the tube pull cylinder as the CE, select Modify>Name… from the main menu to display the Name form. Enter E1301/TUBE_PULL in the Name textbox and press the Return key. Click the Apply button to rename the cylinder and then click the Dismiss button. Although it is unusual to name primitives, this will make the obstruction volume easy to identify and give more meaning to clash reports. www.aveva.com 206
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Select Settings>Graphics… from the main menu to display the Graphics Settings form and select the Representation tab. Check the Holes Drawn checkbox, if not already checked. From the Obstruction pull-down select 50% and then click the Apply button followed by the OK button. The obstruction volume is now displayed, semitranslucent, in the 3D View.
The modelling of Reboiler E1301 is now complete and should look like this:
Save Work.
www.aveva.com 207
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 7 This exercise creates the Stabiliser Column, tagged C1101. The equipment is comprised of a column and a skirt support, which will each be a sub-equipment (SUBE) element owning the relevant primitives. The Equipment GA for C1101, together with the Nozzle Schedule, is shown below.
Iso 3 View www.aveva.com
208
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 209
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
C1101 Nozzle Schedule Nozzle N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 M1 M2 M3
Size 100 NB 250 NB 200 NB 50 NB 150 NB 100 NB 50 NB 50 NB 50 NB 50 NB 40 NB 50 NB 450 NB 450 NB 450 NB
Type 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange 300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information •
Create one sub-equipment named /SKIRT and one sub-equipment named /COLUMN. The origins of both sub-equipments should be the same as for the EQUI element as all dimensions are give to the underside of the baseplate.
•
The skirt is constructed of a 1473 OD x 30WT tube and has a 600 OD x 20WT access sleeve on the southern axis.
•
Nozzle N1 is part of the skirt.
www.aveva.com 210
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 8 This exercise creates Reflux Drum, tagged D1201. The Equipment GA for D1201, together with the Nozzle Schedule, is shown below.
Nozzle Schedule
www.aveva.com 211
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 212
CHAPTER 10
10 Equipment Modelling Using Templates In the previous chapter equipment items were created using primitives arranged in 3D space but with no relationship between them. PDMS enables equipment templates to be created such that an equipment item can be created by copying the template and creating an instance of it in Design.
10.1 Equipment Template Overview An equipment template is a collection of primitives that make up the equipment shape grouped together under a template. The templates are held in a Design database which is referenced when an instance of the template is created. A template may be un-parameterised, in which case the equipment is of fixed design and dimensions or it may be parameterised using properties so that many different sizes may be obtained from one template. Parameterised templates contain rules that enable primitive sizes, positions, orientations, etc. to be modified, depending on property values entered by the user. One of the biggest benefits of using thoughtfully defined parameterised templates is that by modifying one or more property values all affected primitives in the template are modified in accordance with the rules, thus making modification quicker and easier. The use of un-parameterised templates for items that do not change size, or a range of items that have fixed sizes, that occurs many times in a project or across projects may aid productivity. Equipment Templates are selected using a Specification or a Selection Table which are held in a Paragon database. The two methods of selection are slightly different and are described later in this chapter.
www.aveva.com 213
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.2 Creating Standard Equipment – A Worked Example This worked example creates two stacked Stabiliser Heat Exchangers, tagged E1302A and E1302B, using pre-defined equipment templates. The equipments will also be created using a User Defined Element Type (UDET) of :HEATEX
10.2.1 Information The Equipment GA for the two heat exchangers, together with Nozzle Schedules and stacking arrangement are shown below. E1302A
E1302B
All dimensions are the same as E1302A
www.aveva.com 214
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Nozzle Schedule Nozzle
Size
Type
NS1
100 NB
150lb Ansi Flange
NS2
100 NB
150lb Ansi Flange
N1
150 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
N2
150 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
Stacking Arrangement
www.aveva.com 215
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.2.2 Creating E1302B E1302B will be created first as it is the top exchanger and only has one set of supports. The template for this equipment will be selected using the Specification option.
See section 10.3 for information on using the Selection Table option.
10.2.2.1 Selecting the Template
In the Equipment Application with the CE set to the EQUI.ZONE, select Create>Standard Equipment… from the main menu to display the Create Equipment form. Enter the name E1302B in the Name textbox and press the Return key. From the User Defined Type options list select HEATEX. This will create the equipment as a UDET :HEATEX Select the Specification radio button and from the Specification options list select AVEVA Standard Equipment to display the first set of selections in the AVEVA Standard list. Select “Standard” Heat Exchangers from the list. This places the option in the Current Selection list and changes the AVEVA Standard list to the Heat Exchanger Type list with a new set of options:
Select “Horizontal” Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers from the Heat Exchanger Type list to display the Specific Type list:
www.aveva.com 216
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Select “Horizontal” Dished & Flanged Ends from the Specific Type list to display the Selection list. Select the only option from this list, i.e. “EXCH 005” Dished And Flanged With Nozzles. This is the name and description of the template from which an instance will be made.
The selection process is now complete, i.e. there are no more selections to choose from. A representation of the selected template is displayed in the 3D View at the bottom of the form.
www.aveva.com 217
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.2.2.2 Setting the Properties Click the Properties… button on the Create Equipment form to display the Modify Properties form for the heat exchanger:
Each property of the template has an assigned letter, a description and a default value. The drawing in the graphics view may be zoomed, using the mouse scroll wheel, or zoomed in using a window by clicking and holding down the left mouse button whilst dragging a rectangle on the view. When zoomed in, clicking the middle mouse button will progressively zoom out.
The drawing shows the location of the dimensional properties and the origin of the template which, in this case, is on the centreline of the heat exchanger (in the centre of the body cylinder) and in line with nozzles N1 and N2.
Using the Equipment GA for E1302B, enter the following values for the dimensional properties on the form: Property A B C D E F G H J K
Description Flange Diameter Exchanger Diam Flange Thickness Head Height Exchanger Length Dish Height Dish Radius Nozzle Height Distance Between N2 and N3 Distance Between N1 and N4
Value 570 460 25 305 5655 100 40 460 4625 550
www.aveva.com 218
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The drawing on the form shows the exchanger with no supports and the Exchange Support property is set to a default of No Supports. Click the small down arrow adjacent to the textbox to display the Exchanger Support form. Select the Horizontal Exchanger Feet option sets the property to this option. Click the Modify Properties for Exchanger Support button to display the Modify Properties form for the exchanger supports, which also contains a number of properties and a drawing of the supports. This form will create the exchanger supports as a sub-equipment of the equipment, or UDET. Referring to the Equipment GA, enter the following values against the properties: A = Origin to Foot 1070 B = Feet to Feet 2870 C = Foot Thickness 150 D = Foot Width 380 E = Distance to CL 450 Click the OK button to enter the values and dismiss the form. On the Modify Properties form for the Exchanger click the OK button to enter the values and dismiss the form.
10.2.2.3 Specifying the Position On the Create Equipment form, click the Apply button. The prompt Enter Equipment Origin Snap (Snap): is displayed in the main prompt area and the Positioning Control Toolbar is activated. The exchanger origin may be positioned using an EDG pick, however, it is more likely that an explicit position will be given. Click the Explicit Position button form:
on the Positioning Control Toolbar to display the Explicit Position
From the Equipment Location Drawing, the following values can be derived for the origin of E1302B: • East • North • Up
-312370 (this is a Westing, therefore –ve East) 294460 109757
Enter the values in the Explicit Position form and click the Apply button. Dismiss the Create Equipment form.
www.aveva.com 219
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The heat exchanger E1302B should now look like this:
10.2.2.4 Finishing E1302B During the equipment creation process certain data could not be specified, i.e.: • The orientation of the heat exchanger • Nozzle names • Nozzle specification This data must be corrected after the creation of the equipment. The origin of the Heat Exchanger is in the correct position, however, from the Equipment Location Drawing it can be seen that the flanged end must be at the southern end of the equipment, i.e. the equipment needs to be rotated 180º about the Z axis of the origin. With E1302B as the CE, click the Model Editor button Locator Handle at the origin of E1302B.
to enter Model Editor Mode and display the
Right click on the rotate about Z rotation handle and select the Enter Value… option from the pop-up menu to display the Rotate Selection About Z form. Enter a value of 180 in the textbox and then click the Preview button to see if the rotation gives the correct result. If correct, click the OK button to rotate the heat exchanger. Exit Model Editor mode.
In Design Explorer click on NOZZ 1 to make it the current element. Comparing the Equipment GA with the template drawing, this nozzle should be named NS1. Select Modify>Name… from the main menu to display the Name form. Enter E1302B/NS1 in the Name textbox, press the Return key and click the Apply button to modify the name.
Navigate to NOZZ 2 in Design Explorer and click the CE button on the Name form. Enter E1302B/NS2 in the Name textbox, press the Return key and click the Apply button. Repeat the operation for NOZZ 3, entering E1302B/N2, and NOZZ 4 entering E1302B/N1. Dismiss the Name form.
www.aveva.com 220
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Navigate to NOZZ E1302B/NS1 in Design Explorer and select Modify>Nozzle Specification… from the main menu to display the Nozzle Specification form. From the E1302B Nozzle Schedule, NS1 should be a 100 NB 150lb Ansi Flange nozzle.
Select ANSI-NOZZLES from the Specification, options list, 150lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list and 100 from the Nominal Bore options list. Click the Apply button to change the nozzle specification. Navigate to NOZZ E1302B/NS2 in Design Explorer. Click the CE button on the Nozzle Specification form. From the Nozzle Schedule this should also be a 100 NB 150lb Ansi Flange nozzle. Select ANSI-NOZZLES from the Specification options list, 150lb Ansi Flanges from the Generic Type options list and 100 from the Nominal Bore options list. Click the Apply button. Repeat the process for nozzle E1302/N1, a 150 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle, and nozzle E1302B/N2, also a 150 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle. Dismiss the Nozzle Specification form.
10.2.3 Creating E1302A using Copy Mirror From the Equipment GA drawings it can be seen that E1302A is a mirror of E1302B with some nozzle specification differences and additional ‘feet’ to support E1302B. Rather than go through the creation process again, it is easier to copy E1302B, using Copy Mirror, and make the required changes and additions afterwards. With E1302B as the current element, select Create>Copy Mirror… from the main menu to display the Mirror form. Select Rel. from the to options list to place the copy in the same place in the hierarchy as the original. Select Cursor>Element from the form menu and graphically pick the main body cylinder of E1302B. This sets the mirror plane origin at the origin of the cylinder. The coordinates of the origin are displayed on the form. Enter U in the Plane direction text box to make the plane an Up plane. From the Stacking Arrangement on the Equipment GA, it can be seen that the centreline of E1302A is 922 mm below the centreline of E1302B. The plane must, therefore, be moved to an elevation of 109757 – (922 ÷ 2) = 109296, i.e. in the middle of the two centreline elevations. Enter the value in the Up textbox and click the Apply button to create the new heat exchanger. Click the Yes button on the confirmation message to retain the copy. Dismiss the Mirror form.
www.aveva.com 221
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.2.3.1 Finishing E1302A During the copy mirror process there was no opportunity to rename the equipment or the nozzles, therefore, the renaming must be done after the heat exchanger has been created. Navigate to the new EQUI element in Design Explorer and select Modify>Name… from the main menu to display the Name form. Enter E1302A in the Name textbox, press the Return key and click the Apply button. The nozzles also need to be renamed in accordance with the Equipment GA for E1302A. Navigate to NOZZ 1 of E1302A in Design Explorer. Click the CE button on the name form and enter E1302A/NS2 in the Name textbox, pres the Return key and click the Apply button to rename the nozzle. Repeat the process, entering the following values for the remaining three nozzles: • NOZZ 2 enter E1302A/NS1 • NOZZ 3 enter E1302A/N1 • NOZZ 4 enter E1302A/N2 The nozzle specification for Nozzle N2 on E1302A is different from that of Nozzle N1 on E1302B and must be re-specified as an 80 NB 300lb Ansi Flange nozzle. Navigate to the nozzle in Design Explorer and select Modify>Nozzle Specification… from the main menu to display the Nozzle Specification form. Verify that the Specification is already be set at ANSI-NOZZLES and the Generic Type set to 300lb Ansi Flanges, and select 80 from the Nominal Bore options list, click the Apply button and dismiss the form. E1302A requires two additional feet to support E1302B. The new feet will be created by copying and rotating the existing feet. Click on the Create/Modify Lists button on the Default Toolbar, or select Utilities>Lists… from the main menu, to display the List/Collections form Select Add>List… from the form menu to display the Create List form:
Enter FEET into the Description textbox and click the OK button to create the list. Select Add>Identified from the form menu and graphically pick the two boxes that form existing feet on E1302A. Press the Esc key to end the selection and the two boxes are displayed on the form grid. Select Control>Close from the form menu to close the form. Note that the list is displayed as the current list in the Active List options list.
www.aveva.com 222
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Select Create>Copy>Rotate… from the main menu to display the Copy and Rotate form. Select List from the Object options list and Rel. from the to options list. Enter 180 in the Angle textbox. Select Cursor>Element from the form menu and graphically select the main body cylinder of E1302A. Verify that the axis aid is located at the origin of the cylinder and pointing along the axis of the cylinder. Click the Apply button to create the new feet and click the Yes button on the Retain created copies? confirmation message. Dismiss the Copy and Rotate form.
E1302A and E1302B are now complete and should look like this:
www.aveva.com 223
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.3 Using Selection Tables Using Selection Tables to select a template for equipment or UDET is similar to the Specification method except that all options for a class of equipment are displayed in a grid on the form and may be selected and viewed without de-selecting and re-selecting an option as is the case for the Specification method. Each template reference is stored as a GPART element in a Catalogue database and are grouped together by a CTABLE element, also stored in a Catalogue database. Clicking the Selection Table radio button on the Create Equipment form enables the Selection Table options list that contains the currently available selection tables. The middle part of the form is modified to display the Type options list and a grid that displays the available templates for the currently selected types. Selecting a different type from the Type options list changes the contents of the grid. The contents of the grid may be grouped, filtered and sorted as required. Selecting a grid entry displays a model of the selected template in the 3D view at the bottom of the form in a similar way after making the final selection using the Specification method. Clicking the Properties… button displays the Modify Properties form, in exactly the same way as the Specification method, where the equipment’s properties may be specified. Clicking the Apply but displays the Enter Equipment Origin Snap (Snap): prompt, again in exactly the same way as the Specification method.
www.aveva.com 224
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 9 This exercise creates the four pumps: •
The duty and standby Reflux Pumps, tagged P1501A and P1501B.
•
The duty and standby Overhead Product Pumps, tagged P1502A and P1502B.
The Equipment GA for each set of pumps, together with the Nozzle Schedules, are shown below. P1501A & B
Nozzle Schedule Nozzle
Size
Type
N1 - Suction
100 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
N2 - Discharge
50 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information for P1501A & B • The pumps are Centrifugal, Centreline Mounted, Tangential Outlet Pumps (AVEVA Standard, template PUMP005). • Use the Selection Table option for specifying the pump. • To use the template, the origin position of the pump must be derived from the positional information given on the Equipment Location drawing. • Create the first pump as a UDET :PUMP and copy offset this pump to create the second pump.
www.aveva.com 225
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
P1502A & B
Nozzle Schedule Nozzle
Size
Type
N1 - Suction
100 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
N2 - Discharge
50 NB
300lb Ansi Flange
Additional Information for P1502A & B • The pumps are Centrifugal, Centreline Mounted, Vertical Offset Nozzle Pumps (AVEVA Standard, template PUMP006). • Use the Selection Table option for specifying the pump. • To use the template, the origin position of the pump must be derived from the positional information given on the Equipment Location drawing. • Create the first pump as a UDET :PUMP and copy offset this pump to create the second pump.
www.aveva.com 226
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.4 Creating Electrical Components An electrical component (ELCONN) in equipment is a connection point between equipment and cables and can represent anything from an individual cable gland to a piece of electrical equipment, such as a generator. Electrical components are catalogue items and are selected from the catalogue via a selection table and are positioned and orientated within equipment in the same way as nozzles and primitives. Selecting the Electrical Component… option from the Create menu displays the Create Electrical Component form. The form enables an electrical component to be made from the range of catalogue items available. The overall category of electrical component is selected by choosing one of the Table options. This table may be divided into sub-categories selected using the Type options and can be sorted and filtered to restrict the number of components displayed for selection. A component in the table can be selected by clicking on a row in the table. Clicking on the Properties button displays the Modify Properties form on which to set any parameterised data relevant to the selected electrical component. If there are no parameterised properties the following error message is displayed:
The Plotfile button is active if a plot file of the component is available.
www.aveva.com 227
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
When the electrical component has been fully specified, clicking the Create button creates the component at the equipment origin. The bottom part of the Create Electrical Component form is changed to display a Component Position panel. This position of the electrical component may be specified by entering appropriate values in the coordinate textboxes or by using event-driven graphics positioning to place the component using the graphics cursor to pick a position in the 3D view. When the electrical component has been positioned, clicking the Next button changes the form to its original state, enabling another electrical component to be created. Clicking the Dismiss button closes the form. Electrical components may be orientated by selecting the Orientate>Rotate or Orientate>Axes options from the main menu.
L
If the project has been configured with User Defined Element Types based on electrical component (ELCONN) element type, they will appear in the User Defined Type list. When the electrical component element is created, it will be created as the User Defined Type selected from this list. Selecting a User Defined Element Type may change the content of the Selection Table if the table has been configured to filter on element type.
www.aveva.com 228
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
10.4.1 Creating an Electrical Component – A Worked Example Clear the Draw List and add back pump P1501B. Click the Walk to Drawlist button and set the view direction to Iso 3. With P1501B as the CE, select Create>Electrical Component… from the main menu to display the Create Electrical Component form. Select ELCONN-EQUI.TABGRO from the Table options list and select ELCONN_T3 from the displayed grid. An image of the component is displayed in the 3D view at the bottom of the form. Click the Create button to create the ELCONN and display the Component Position area at the bottom of the form.
Enter East 140 and South 800 in the appropriate textboxes and click the Dismiss button. Note that the ELCONN has been created in Design Explorer.
To correct orientate the ELCONN, make sure it is the CE and select Orientate>Primitive>Point… from the main menu to display the Point Orientation form. Select 2 from the Point options list and enter W in the textbox. Click the Apply button to re-orientate the component. Turn on the Ppoints using the Graphics Settings form and note that the ELCONN has three Ppoints representing the terminals for the electrical component.
www.aveva.com 229
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Turn off the Ppoint display. Save Work
www.aveva.com 230
CHAPTER 11
11 Equipment Utilities The Equipment Application provides two utilities that can aid productivity for equipment modelling and reporting, the Equipment Import Utility and the Equipment Report Utility.
11.1 Import Equipment Utility The Import Equipment utility enables EQUI elements to be created in the database by importing data from an Excel (.xls) or comma separated value (.csv) file. The import data may set any of the standard attributes or UDAs of an EQUI element but will not create any primitives. Selecting Utilities>Import Equipment… from the main menu displays the Import Data form, a standard Windows browser dialogue, where the file to be imported may be located. Once found clicking the Open button on the form dismisses the form and imports the data. The data may take a short time to process, depending on the size of the import file. Once processed, the Spread Sheet Import form is opened, displaying the results of the import.
At this stage no data has been loaded into the database, i.e. no elements have been created. The form previews the data being loaded from the import file. When the file is loaded, some preliminary analysis of the data is carried out, and three icons, displayed to the left of the table, indicate the result ofwww.aveva.com that analysis. 231
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
This icon indicates that no equipment with the name exists in the database. If the data is loaded, an element of this name will be created. This icon indicates that equipment with the name already exists in the database. If the Load All Data function is used, then attributes of the existing equipment will be modified. No action will be taken on rows with this icon if the Load New Data button is used.
This icon indicates that the system has identified a problem with this row of data. No action will be taken on rows with this icon when the Load All Data or Load New Data buttons are used. Selecting this row in the table will display a message in the Messages area of the form to indicate why this row cannot be processed.
Clicking the Load All Data button will process all of the rows that create a new element or modify an existing element. Clicking the Load New Data button will only process the rows that create new elements.
L
New data is created at the current location in the database if an owning element field is not included in the imported file. The owning element is considered to be the current element when the file was loaded and the rows of data analysed, not the current element when a Load button is pressed. If an owning element field is provided in the import file, the system will attempt to create elements under the specified owner.
www.aveva.com 232
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Once imported, the icons on the left of the form change to indicate the status of the loaded data. This icon indicates that the creation or modification operation was successful, i.e. an element has been created or modified in the database. This icon indicates that the operation has not completed successfully because of an error found while the system was trying to create or modify an element. If an attribute value is incorrect then the element has been created, but not all of its attribute data has been loaded. The Undo function may be used to remove all of the changes made by the load operation and revert the database back to its state before the load, or the errors on the erroneous elements dealt with individually. Selecting a row in the table with this icon will display a message in the Messages area of the form to indicate the error.
or selecting the Browse link label to Another import file can be loaded by using the Open File button open the Import Data form, or by typing a name directly into the filename textbox on the form. The Reload Data button reloads the file shown in the filename textbox. This may be necessary if the current element was incorrect or an owner element was missing when the file was first loaded. It is possible to load element types other than Equipment using this utility. If the imported file is carefully constructed, following the rules listed below, it would be possible to import other element types provided that fields in the file contain all of the required data. For example, a nozzle list could be loaded provided that the owning equipment name is provided in an Owner field for each nozzle element, and the Type field identifies the element as a nozzle
11.1.1 Rules for the Content of Import XLS and CSV Files • The file must be a valid CSV format or XLS format file. • The first row of the file contains a list of headings. Each heading represents a column in the file containing an attribute of the elements being loaded. • There must be a NAME column; otherwise the file will not be loaded. The NAME column may contain the name of a new element, or the name of an existing element. If an existing element name is used, then this row is an update row for that element. The name used must obey the normal rules for element naming in PDMS. • There must be a TYPE column. This column contains the database element type of the element being loaded, e.g. EQUI. If this column is absent, the file will not be loaded. If the Project has been configured with User Defined Element Types, then this column could contain a valid UDET name (e.g.: PUMP). If the named element already exists, but its element type does not match the TYPE in the file, then this row will be ignored and an error raised. • An OWNER column may be included. If this column is present, it must contain the name of an existing element that will own each imported item when it is created. This owner name will be ignored if the imported item already exists, i.e. it is not possible to change the owner of existing Equipment by using the OWNER column. If the OWNER column does not exist in the file, then the owner is the current location in the Design db hierarchy at the time that the file is loaded and analysed. In this case, the current database element at the time that the file is loaded must be able to contain imported elements. • The remaining headings in the file must be valid attribute names for the element type being loaded. The attribute names may include User Defined Attribute (UDA) names.
www.aveva.com 233
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
• Columns cannot be added for array type attributes unless those attributes can be set using a list of values in a single field in the file. For example, the string "10 20 30" in a DESP field would set design parameter 1 to 10, 2 to 20 and 3 to 30. • Every row following the heading row must contain the correct number of fields (columns) as defined by the heading row. • Every row must contain valid values, or no values, for each field. • If a new element is being created, an attribute will be set to its default value if a field in the file is empty. Two adjacent separators denote an empty field. The NAME and TYPE fields cannot be empty. • If an existing element is being modified, an attribute value will remain unchanged if a field in the file is empty. • It is not possible to unset an attribute value from a file, other than by providing the default value. For example "X0Y0Z0" for a position. • Each field in the file must be a text field. Care must be taken with fields containing values that are considered by Microsoft Excel to be a formula. For example a database reference number in the form "=123/456" would be considered to be a formula because of the = character. This can be overcome by proceeding the = character with a single quote character that forces the field to be treated as a text string. If the file will not load successfully into Microsoft Excel, it will not load successfully using this import utility. Any import of new or modified element data will be subject to the data access control configuration implemented for the current user and Project. This utility will not attempt to claim data automatically in an Explicit Claim database. If the data is imported into an Implicit Claim database, then the appropriate elements will be claimed, if not already claimed by another user.
11.2 Equipment Report Utility The Equipment Report utility is specifically designed to quickly generate configurable equipment reports using the equipment elements and their attributes stored in the Design databases. The reports may be exported to Excel for printing or additional enhancement. Selecting Utilities>Equipment Report… from the main menu displays the Equipment Report form:
www.aveva.com 234
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The form has two tabs, Columns and Output.
11.2.1 Selecting Attributes to Output The Columns tab has two panes, one on the left of the form showing Available Attributes and one on the right showing Chosen Attributes which, by default, is empty. The Available Attributes pane shows the standard attributes and UDAs of an EQUI element, in alphanumeric order, together with their Description, Data Type and Report Header, i.e. the text that will appear at the top of the column if the attribute is selected to appear in the report. The Pseudo Attributes checkbox, which is by default unchecked, may be used to include the pseudo attributes of an EQUI element in the Available Attributes list, thereby making them available for inclusion in the report. Once the attribute selection process has commenced the Pseudo Attributes checkbox is greyed out, therefore, the choice whether to include them in the report must be made before attribute selection starts. Emptying the Chosen Attributes grid re-activates the Pseudo Attributes checkbox.
Between the two panels are four buttons that facilitate transfer of the attributes from one pane to another. Adds the selected attributes to the Chosen Attributes list. Adds all attributes to the Chosen Attributes list. Removes selected attributes from the Chosen Attributes list. Removes all attributes from the Chosen Attributes list. Left clicking on an attribute in either list highlights the selection. Multiple attributes may be selected in either list using the standard Windows selection methods, i.e. the Ctrl and Shift keys. Attributes may only appear in one of the lists; therefore, attributes added to the Chosen Attributes list no longer appear in the Available Attributes list. The attributes will populate the Chosen Attributes list in the order they are selected. Multiple, non-contiguous selections will appear in alpha-numeric order when added to the Chosen Attributes list. The four buttons on the right hand side of the Chosen attributes pane may be used to modify the list order. Moves the selected attributes to the top of the list. Moves the selected attributes up the list. Moves the selected attributes down the list. Moves the selected attributes to the bottom of the list.
www.aveva.com 235
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
11.2.2 Outputting Attributes Having selected and ordered the Chosen attributes, selecting the Output tab presents the data in a grid gadget where the columns are in the order specified in the Chosen attributes list and the column headings are the Report Header texts.
L
The Equipment Report utility outputs every EQUI element found in the current MDB. The data in the output tab grid may be grouped, filtered, sorted and summarised as described for the Search Utility in section 7.4 of this training guide. The only addition to these facilities is the inclusion of the Clear All Filters button corner of the grid gadget. Clicking the button clears all of the column filters, if set.
at the top left
Once the data has been manipulated to suit the report requirements, clicking the Save button on the Equipment Report form opens the Equipment Report Filename form, a standard Windows browser dialogue, where the location and filename of the output may be specified. Clicking the Save button on the Equipment Report Filename form saves the file with the specified filename to the specified location and closes the form. Saving the output activates the Open button on the Equipment Report form which opens the saved file in Excel.
www.aveva.com 236
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Grouped and filter operations on the Output tab are reflected in the resulting Excel file.
www.aveva.com 237
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 10 This exercise imports a csv file to create a number of equipment elements and generates various equipment reports. •
Create a SITE named /New_Equipment and a ZONE named /Equipment_List.
•
Import file TM-1001_Ex10_EquipImport.csv, located in the pdmsuser folder typically C:\AVEVA\Plant\Training\pdmsuser, to the new Zone.
•
Create, and export to Excel, equipment reports for: a) all the equipment in the MDB b) all the equipment in the Stabiliser Site c) all the equipment in the New_Equipment Site.
•
The equipment reports should show the following attributes in the order given: a) b) c) d) e) f)
NAMN (Pseudo Attribute) Owner ActType Description Position Orientation
www.aveva.com 238
CHAPTER 12
12 Volume Modelling Volume Models are, essentially, equipment items that are not EQUI elements. They may be used for modelling any item in PDMS that is to be constructed from primitives but does not want to appear in Design Explorer as an EQUI element. A typical use of volume models may be, say, plant Civils items, e.g. concrete slabs, concrete plinths, site roads, etc., or escape routes/access obstruction volumes.
12.1 The Volume Model Hierarchy Volume Model (VOLM) elements are owned by Zones (ZONE). VOLM elements have some of the attributes of an EQUI and may own primitives directly, with the exception of Nozzles. VOLM elements may own one or more optional Sub-Volume Models (SVOLM) elements which may own any primitive except Nozzles. The SVOLM elements are used to break down Volume Models into sub-parts and are similar, and have some of the same attributes of, SUBE elements.
12.2 Creating VOLM and SVOLM Elements
In the Design General application, selecting Utilities>General… from the main menu displays the User General form.
With a ZONE as the CE, selecting Create>(c) Volume Model… from the form menu displays the Volume Model form. The form is similar to the Create Equipment form described earlier in the training guide, except that there is no Attributes… button as VOLM elements do not have the attributes that are set by this option. VOLM elements may be named and the Position option lists and textboxes enable its origin to be set with respect to any element, as for an EQUI element.
With a VOLM as the CE, selecting Create>(c) SubVolume… from the form menu displays the Sub Volume Model form. This form is similar to the Create Sub-equipment form described earlier in this training guide. SVOLM elements may be named and the Position option lists and textboxes enable its origin to be set with respect to any element, as for an SUBE element.
www.aveva.com
239
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
12.3 Creating Primitives Primitives may be owned directly by a VOLM element or by a SVOLM element. All primitives, except NOZZ elements may be owned by the elements. Selecting Create> (c) Primitives… from the User General form menu displays the same Primitives creation forms described earlier for Equipment primitives.
L
Alternatively, having created the VOLM or SVOLM, selecting Create>Primitives… from the main menu in the Equipment application will display the Primitives form.
www.aveva.com 240
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
12.4 Creating Volume and Sub Volume Models – A Worked Example This worked example creates some civil engineering work for the Stabilizer project, specifically the concrete base slab. It is common in PDMS to represent concrete civil engineering works with EQUI elements; however, for this example the slab is a UDET based on a VOLM and the plinths and bases will be UDETs based on a SVOLM, owned by the slab. Exit PDMS and login to again as a Civils Designer using the details provided by the Trainer, for example: Project:: Training (TRA) Username: A.CIVILMAN Password: A MDB: A-CIVIL Module: Design Select Utilities>Training Setup… from the main menu to display the Training Setup form. Select the Foundations tab if not the current tab.
Check the Setup Volume Modelling checkbox. Click the Apply button. Click the Cancel button to dismiss the form. The Stabilizer civil elements in ZONE-CIVIL-AREA01 have now been deleted from the database.
www.aveva.com 241
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The details of the slab are shown in the following General Arrangement drawing:
www.aveva.com 242
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
12.4.1 Creating the Slab UDET Select Utilities>User Grid Systems… from the main menu to display the User Grid Systems form. Select the Area01_Grid entry on the form, click the Gridline IDs radio button and click the Display button. Set the view direction to Iso3 and click the Set View Limits to Grid button.
Click the Close button to dismiss the form. Enter the Equipment application and navigate to /SITE-CIVIL-AREA01. Navigate to or create a new Zone named /ZONE-CIVIL-AREA01 and make it the CE. In the Command Window enter NEW :SLAB /BASE_SLAB. The User Defined Element Type :SLAB has been previously defined in Lexicon. Query the attributes and note that the ActType is :SLAB and the Type is Volmodel. Select Position>Explicitly (AT)… from the main menu to display the Explicit Position form. On the Positioning Control Toolbar, set the Pick Type to Aid and the Pick Method to Snap. Left click on the grid at the intersection between Gridline ID N and Gridline ID 0, i.e. the North-West corner of the horizontal grid. The Explicit Position form should now show the origin of the slab at W 322000 N 311000 U 100000. Click the Apply button and then the Dismiss button.
www.aveva.com 243
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
12.4.2 Creating the Slab Primitive The slab profile could be made of several BOX primitives; however, it may also be made from an extrusion. Select Create>Primitives… from the main menu to display the Create Primitive form.
Click on the Extrusion button or link label to display the Create Extrusion form. Enter 22000 in the Thickness textbox. Leave the Representation at Default, Levels 0 10, Obstruction Hard. Click the Explicitly defined position button to display the Define vertex form.
L
Extrusions are 2D shapes that are extruded through a distance. An extrusion is made up of three elements
• • •
EXTR – the extrusion itself. The Position attribute holds the World position of the extrusion origin and the Height attribute holds the extrusion distance. LOOP – this is the 2D shape that owns a series of vertices, one at each change in direction of the shape. VERT – these are the vertices. Their position is expressed in local co-ordinates, i.e. with respect to the EXTR origin. Enter /BASE_SLAB in the wrt textbox so that the extrusions origin is with respect to its owner. The co-ordinates will be updated on the form. Enter 0 in each of the three co-ordinate textboxes so that the extrusion origin is at the origin of the :SLAB. Click the Apply button to create vertex 1 and then click the Dismiss button.
A text aid showing the Origin of the extrusion is displayed in the 3D View. Click the Point offset from previous (Direction and Distance) button on the Create Extrusion form to display the Create vertex form. Enter E in the Direction textbox and 250 in the Distance textbox. Click the Apply button to create vertex 2. Do not dismiss the form.
www.aveva.com 244
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
A text aid showing the Last Vertex is displayed in the vertex 2 position. Note that on the Create Extrusion form the text 2 Vertices defined (No extrusion created is displayed). It requires a minimum of three points to describe a shape; therefore the extrusion is not displayed until after the creation of the third vertex. Using the Define vertex form, continue creating the remaining vertices using the data from the following table, remembering to click the Apply button on the Define vertex each time new data is entered. The number of vertices created is displayed on the Create Extrusion form. Vertex No. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Direction D E U E D E U E D W U W
Distance 400 450 400 16950 900 900 900 450 1200 1600 600 17400
After creating vertex 14, click the Dismiss button on the Define vertex form. Click the OK button on the Create Extrusion form. The Stabiliser BASE_SLAB should now look like this:
www.aveva.com 245
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Exercise 11 This exercise creates the further civil engineering elements for the Stabiliser Plant Area 01, including specifically the equipment bases and column plinths. The column plinths are 400mm square on plan and 400mm high, i.e. the top of each plinth is at EL.(+) 100400. The plinths are located at the intersection of the following Gridline IDs: A1, B1, A2, B2, A4, B4, A6, B6, C3, C4, D3, D4, E3, E4, E5, F3 and F4. Each plinth is to be created as a UDET :PLINTH, be named for its grid reference, i.e. PLINTH_A1, PLINTH_A2, etc. and consist of a single BOX primitive. The :PLINTH UDET is based on a SVOLM element and will be owned by the slab created in the worked example. Seven equipment bases are required, one for Stabilizer Column C1101, two for the Reboiler E1301 and one each for the Pumps P1501A, P1501B, P1502A and P1502B. The base for C1101 is to be created as a UDET :BASE. The base will be 2200mm square in plan and be 305mm high, i.e. the top of the base is at EL. (+) 100305. The base should be centred on the centreline of the Stabilizer Column and consist of a single BOX primitive. The bases for P1501A and P1501B are to be created as UDETs :BASE. Each base will be 1440mm long x 560mm wide x 305 high, i.e. the top of the bases is at EL. (+) 100305. The bases should be centred on the pump baseplates and consist of a single BOX primitive. The bases for P1502A and P1502B are to be created as UDETs :BASE. Each base will be 1730mm long x 840mm wide x 305 high, i.e. the top of the bases is at EL. (+) 100305. The bases should be centred on the pump baseplates and consist of a single BOX primitive. The bases for E1301 is to be created as a UDETs :BASE. Each base is 750mm long in the East/West direction, 500mm long in the North/South direction and is 845mm high, i.e. the top of the base is at EL. (+) 100845. The bases should be centred on the equipment saddles and consist of a single BOX primitive. The :BASE UDET is based on a SVOLM element and will be owned by the slab created in the worked example.
www.aveva.com 246
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
The finished civil works for the Stabilizer Plant Area 01 should look like this:
www.aveva.com 247
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
www.aveva.com 248
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A – AVEVA Equipment Primitives Box (BOX)
Specific geometric attributes: Xlength Length parallel to X axis Ylength Length parallel to Y axis Zlength Length parallel to Z axis
Cylinder (CYLI)
Specific geometric attributes: Diameter Diameter of cylinder Height Length parallel to Z axis
www.aveva.com 249
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Cone (CONE)
Specific geometric attributes: Dtop Diameter at top of cone Dbottom Diameter at bottom of cone Height Length parallel to Z axis
Snout (SNOU)
Specific geometric attributes: Dtop Diameter at top of snout Dbottom Diameter at bottom of snout Xoffset Offset of centre of top from centre of bottom on X axis Yoffest Offset of centre of top from centre of bottom on Y axis Height Length parallel to Z axis
L
Only an Xoffset is show in this example, however, both Yoffset and Xoffset may be set.
www.aveva.com 250
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Pyramid (PYRA)
Specific geometric attributes: Xbottom Length of bottom of pyramid parallel to X axis Ybottom Length of bottom of pyramid parallel to Y axis Xtop Length of top of pyramid parallel to X axis Ytop Length of top of pyramid parallel to Y axis Height Length parallel to Z axis Xoffset Offset of centre of top from centre of bottom on X axis Yoffset Offset of centre of top from centre of bottom on Y axis
L
Only a Yoffset is show in this example, however, both Yoffset and Xoffset may be set.
Circular Torus (CTOR)
Specific geometric attributes: Rinside Inside radius in XY plane Routside Outside radius in XY plane Angle Subtended angle (maximum 180°)
www.aveva.com 251
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Rectangular Torus (RTOR)
Specific geometric attributes: Rinside Inside radius in XY plane Routside Outside radius in XY plane Height Length parallel to Z axis Angle Subtended angle (maximum 180°)
Dish (DISH)
Specific geometric attributes: Diameter Diameter of dish in XY plane. Height Height of dish parallel to Z axis Radius Knuckle radius
L
If the knuckle radius is 0 then the dish is represented as a segment of a sphere. If the knuckle radius is greater than 0 then the dish is represented as a partial ellipsoid, generally used to represent a torispherical end to a vessel.
www.aveva.com 252
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Sloped Cylinder (SLCY)
Specific geometric attributes: Diameter Diameter of sloped cylinder Height Length in Z axis from bottom centre to top centre Xtshear Inclination of top of cylinder in the XZ axis (in degrees) Ytshear Inclination of top of cylinder in the YZ axis (in degrees) Xbshear Inclination of bottom of cylinder in the XZ axis (in degrees) Ybshear Inclination of top of cylinder in the YZ axis (in degrees)
L
Only an Xtshear and Ybshear are shown in this example, however, Xtshear, Ytshear, Xbshear and Ybshear may be set in any combination to obtain the required results. The values for these attributes may be +ve or –ve.
Extrusion (EXTR)
Specific geometric attributes: Height Height of extrusion in Z axis
L
An extrusion is a 2D shape, defined by a series of vertices at each change in direction, extruded through a height. The primitive consists of three element types, i.e. EXTR, LOOP and VERTs.
www.aveva.com 253
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Solid of Revolution (REVO)
Specific geometric attributes: Angle Rotation angle around X axis (selected rotation line)
L
A solid of revolution is a 2D shape, defined by a series of vertices at each change in direction, rotated through a specified angle around a specified rotation axis. The primitive consists of three element types, i.e. REVO, LOOP and VERTs.
www.aveva.com 254
AVEVA Plant (12 Series) PDMS Foundations TM-1001
Nozzle (NOZZ) Although a nozzle is classed as a primitive, it is unlike the other primitives in that its geometry is determined in Paragon as part of a catalogue component. Nozzles of different types and geometry may be constructed in Paragon to suit the requirements of the Piping Specification. The specific nozzle type is referenced from Paragon using the Spref (Specification Reference) attribute.
Specific geometric attributes: Height Height between nozzle face and end, i.e. from P1 to P2.
www.aveva.com 255
